Mercurial > emacs
comparison etc/NEWS @ 62042:54584b534be1
*** empty log message ***
author | Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Mon, 02 May 2005 20:58:54 +0000 |
parents | 8d4f9eb1c2fa |
children | 68790e90773f |
comparison
equal
deleted
inserted
replaced
62041:82c6429cf333 | 62042:54584b534be1 |
---|---|
16 | 16 |
17 | 17 |
18 * Installation Changes in Emacs 22.1 | 18 * Installation Changes in Emacs 22.1 |
19 | 19 |
20 --- | 20 --- |
21 ** Emacs includes now support for loading image libraries on demand. | 21 ** Emacs now supports new configure options `--program-prefix', |
22 (Currently this feature is only used on MS Windows.) You can configure | 22 `--program-suffix' and `--program-transform-name' that affect the names of |
23 the supported image types and their associated dynamic libraries by | 23 installed programs. |
24 setting the variable `image-library-alist'. | 24 |
25 | 25 --- |
26 --- | 26 ** Emacs can now be built without sound support. |
27 ** New translations of the Emacs Tutorial are available in the following | |
28 languages: Brasilian, Bulgarian, Chinese (both with simplified and | |
29 traditional characters), French, and Italian. Type `C-u C-h t' to | |
30 choose one of them in case your language setup doesn't automatically | |
31 select the right one. | |
32 | 27 |
33 --- | 28 --- |
34 ** You can build Emacs with Gtk+ widgets by specifying `--with-x-toolkit=gtk' | 29 ** You can build Emacs with Gtk+ widgets by specifying `--with-x-toolkit=gtk' |
35 when you run configure. This requires Gtk+ 2.0 or newer. This port | 30 when you run configure. This requires Gtk+ 2.0 or newer. This port |
36 provides a way to display multilingual text in menus (with some caveats). | 31 provides a way to display multilingual text in menus (with some caveats). |
37 | 32 |
38 --- | 33 --- |
39 ** Emacs can now be built without sound support. | |
40 | |
41 --- | |
42 ** The `emacsserver' program has been removed, replaced with elisp code. | 34 ** The `emacsserver' program has been removed, replaced with elisp code. |
43 | |
44 --- | |
45 ** Emacs now supports new configure options `--program-prefix', | |
46 `--program-suffix' and `--program-transform-name' that affect the names of | |
47 installed programs. | |
48 | 35 |
49 --- | 36 --- |
50 ** By default, Emacs now uses a setgid helper program to update game | 37 ** By default, Emacs now uses a setgid helper program to update game |
51 scores. The directory ${localstatedir}/games/emacs is the normal | 38 scores. The directory ${localstatedir}/games/emacs is the normal |
52 place for game scores to be stored. This may be controlled by the | 39 place for game scores to be stored. This may be controlled by the |
76 together with the Emacs User Manual, into the Info directory. A menu | 63 together with the Emacs User Manual, into the Info directory. A menu |
77 item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy accessible | 64 item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy accessible |
78 (Help->More Manuals->Introduction to Emacs Lisp). | 65 (Help->More Manuals->Introduction to Emacs Lisp). |
79 | 66 |
80 --- | 67 --- |
68 ** New translations of the Emacs Tutorial are available in the following | |
69 languages: Brasilian, Bulgarian, Chinese (both with simplified and | |
70 traditional characters), French, and Italian. Type `C-u C-h t' to | |
71 choose one of them in case your language setup doesn't automatically | |
72 select the right one. | |
73 | |
74 --- | |
75 ** A French translation of the `Emacs Survival Guide' is available. | |
76 | |
77 --- | |
78 ** Emacs now includes support for loading image libraries on demand. | |
79 (Currently this feature is only used on MS Windows.) You can configure | |
80 the supported image types and their associated dynamic libraries by | |
81 setting the variable `image-library-alist'. | |
82 | |
83 --- | |
81 ** Support for Cygwin was added. | 84 ** Support for Cygwin was added. |
82 | 85 |
83 --- | 86 --- |
84 ** Support for FreeBSD/Alpha has been added. | 87 ** Support for FreeBSD/Alpha has been added. |
85 | 88 |
97 ** Mac OS 9 port now uses the Carbon API by default. You can also | 100 ** Mac OS 9 port now uses the Carbon API by default. You can also |
98 create non-Carbon build by specifying `NonCarbon' as a target. See | 101 create non-Carbon build by specifying `NonCarbon' as a target. See |
99 the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions. | 102 the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions. |
100 | 103 |
101 --- | 104 --- |
102 ** A French translation of the `Emacs Survival Guide' is available. | |
103 | |
104 --- | |
105 ** Building with -DENABLE_CHECKING does not automatically build with union | 105 ** Building with -DENABLE_CHECKING does not automatically build with union |
106 types any more. Add -DUSE_LISP_UNION_TYPE if you want union types. | 106 types any more. Add -DUSE_LISP_UNION_TYPE if you want union types. |
107 | 107 |
108 | 108 |
109 * Changes in Emacs 22.1 | 109 * Changes in Emacs 22.1 |
110 | 110 |
111 ** New command line option -Q or --quick. | |
112 This is like using -q --no-site-file, but in addition it also disables | |
113 the fancy startup screen. | |
114 | |
115 +++ | |
116 ** New command line option -D or --basic-display. | |
117 Disables the menu-bar, the tool-bar, the scroll-bars, tool tips, and | |
118 the blinking cursor. | |
119 | |
120 +++ | |
121 ** New command line option -nbc or --no-blinking-cursor disables | |
122 the blinking cursor on graphical terminals. | |
123 | |
124 +++ | |
125 ** The command line option --no-windows has been changed to | |
126 --no-window-system. The old one still works, but is deprecated. | |
127 | |
128 +++ | |
129 ** The -f option, used from the command line to call a function, | |
130 now reads arguments for the function interactively if it is | |
131 an interactively callable function. | |
132 | |
133 +++ | |
134 ** Emacs can now be invoked in full-screen mode on a windowed display. | |
135 When Emacs is invoked on a window system, the new command-line options | |
136 `--fullwidth', `--fullheight', and `--fullscreen' produce a frame | |
137 whose width, height, or both width and height take up the entire | |
138 screen size. (For now, this does not work with some window managers.) | |
139 | |
140 +++ | |
141 ** Emacs now displays a splash screen by default even if command-line | |
142 arguments were given. The new command-line option --no-splash | |
143 disables the splash screen; see also the variable | |
144 `inhibit-startup-message' (which is also aliased as | |
145 `inhibit-splash-screen'). | |
146 | |
147 +++ | |
148 ** New user option `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu'. | |
149 When loading many files, for instance with `emacs *', Emacs normally | |
150 displays a buffer menu. This option turns the buffer menu off. | |
151 | |
152 +++ | |
153 ** Init file changes | |
154 You can now put the init files .emacs and .emacs_SHELL under | |
155 ~/.emacs.d or directly under ~. Emacs will find them in either place. | |
156 | |
157 +++ | |
158 ** Emacs now reads the standard abbrevs file ~/.abbrev_defs | |
159 automatically at startup, if it exists. When Emacs offers to save | |
160 modified buffers, it saves the abbrevs too if they have changed. It | |
161 can do this either silently or asking for confirmation first, | |
162 according to the value of `save-abbrevs'. | |
163 | |
164 +++ | |
165 ** The mode line position information now comes before the major mode. | |
166 When the file is maintained under version control, that information | |
167 appears between the position information and the major mode. | |
168 | |
169 +++ | |
170 ** M-g is now a prefix key. | |
171 M-g g and M-g M-g run goto-line. | |
172 M-g n and M-g M-n run next-error (like C-x `). | |
173 M-g p and M-g M-p run previous-error. | |
174 | |
175 +++ | |
176 ** M-o now is the prefix key for setting text properties; | |
177 M-o M-o requests refontification. | |
178 | |
179 +++ | |
180 ** C-u M-x goto-line now switches to the most recent previous buffer, | |
181 and goes to the specified line in that buffer. | |
182 | |
183 When goto-line starts to execute, if there's a number in the buffer at | |
184 point then it acts as the default argument for the minibuffer. | |
185 | |
186 +++ | |
187 ** You can now switch buffers in a cyclic order with C-x C-left and | |
188 (prev-buffer) and C-x C-right (next-buffer). C-x left and C-x right | |
189 can be used as well. | |
190 | |
191 +++ | |
192 ** New command `Buffer-menu-toggle-files-only' toggles display of file | |
193 buffers only in the Buffer Menu. It is bound to `T' in Buffer Menu | |
194 mode. | |
195 | |
196 +++ | |
197 ** `buffer-menu' and `list-buffers' now list buffers whose names begin | |
198 with a space, when those buffers are visiting files. Normally buffers | |
199 whose names begin with space are omitted. | |
200 | |
201 --- | |
202 ** The new options `buffers-menu-show-directories' and | |
203 `buffers-menu-show-status' let you control how buffers are displayed | |
204 in the menu dropped down when you click "Buffers" from the menu bar. | |
205 | |
206 `buffers-menu-show-directories' controls whether the menu displays | |
207 leading directories as part of the file name visited by the buffer. | |
208 If its value is `unless-uniquify', the default, directories are | |
209 shown unless uniquify-buffer-name-style' is non-nil. The value of nil | |
210 and t turn the display of directories off and on, respectively. | |
211 | |
212 `buffers-menu-show-status' controls whether the Buffers menu includes | |
213 the modified and read-only status of the buffers. By default it is | |
214 t, and the status is shown. | |
215 | |
216 Setting these variables directly does not take effect until next time | |
217 the Buffers menu is regenerated. | |
218 | |
219 +++ | |
220 ** The old bindings C-M-delete and C-M-backspace have been deleted, | |
221 since there are situations where one or the other will shut down | |
222 the operating system or your X server. | |
223 | |
224 +++ | |
225 ** `undo-only' does an undo which does not redo any previous undo. | |
226 | |
227 +++ | |
228 ** When the undo information of the current command gets really large | |
229 (beyond the value of `undo-outer-limit'), Emacs discards it and warns | |
230 you about it. | |
231 | |
232 +++ | |
233 ** M-SPC (just-one-space) when given a numeric argument N | |
234 converts whitespace around point to N spaces. | |
235 | |
236 --- | |
237 ** New command `kill-whole-line' kills an entire line at once. | |
238 By default, it is bound to C-S-<backspace>. | |
239 | |
240 +++ | |
241 ** Yanking text now discards certain text properties that can | |
242 be inconvenient when you did not expect them. The variable | |
243 `yank-excluded-properties' specifies which ones. Insertion | |
244 of register contents and rectangles also discards these properties. | |
245 | |
246 +++ | |
247 ** The default values of paragraph-start and indent-line-function have | |
248 been changed to reflect those used in Text mode rather than those used | |
249 in Indented-Text mode. | |
250 | |
251 +++ | |
252 ** Movement commands `beginning-of-buffer', `end-of-buffer', | |
253 `beginning-of-defun', `end-of-defun' do not set the mark if the mark | |
254 is already active in Transient Mark mode. | |
255 | |
256 +++ | |
257 ** The parameters of automatic hscrolling can now be customized. | |
258 The variable `hscroll-margin' determines how many columns away from | |
259 the window edge point is allowed to get before automatic hscrolling | |
260 will horizontally scroll the window. The default value is 5. | |
261 | |
262 The variable `hscroll-step' determines how many columns automatic | |
263 hscrolling scrolls the window when point gets too close to the | |
264 window edge. If its value is zero, the default, Emacs scrolls the | |
265 window so as to center point. If its value is an integer, it says how | |
266 many columns to scroll. If the value is a floating-point number, it | |
267 gives the fraction of the window's width to scroll the window. | |
268 | |
269 The variable `automatic-hscrolling' was renamed to | |
270 `auto-hscroll-mode'. The old name is still available as an alias. | |
271 | |
272 +++ | |
273 ** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a | |
274 previous mark, i.e. C-u C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... cycles through the | |
275 mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC to set the mark immediately after a jump. | |
276 | |
277 +++ | |
278 ** Marking commands extend the region when invoked multiple times. If | |
279 you hit M-C-SPC (mark-sexp), M-@ (mark-word), M-h (mark-paragraph), or | |
280 C-M-h (mark-defun) repeatedly, the marked region extends each time, so | |
281 you can mark the next two sexps with M-C-SPC M-C-SPC, for example. | |
282 This feature also works for mark-end-of-sentence, if you bind that to | |
283 a key. It also extends the region when the mark is active in Transient | |
284 Mark mode, regardless of the last command. To start a new region with | |
285 one of marking commands in Transient Mark mode, you can deactivate the | |
286 active region with C-g, or set the new mark with C-SPC. | |
287 | |
288 +++ | |
289 ** M-h (mark-paragraph) now accepts a prefix arg. | |
290 With positive arg, M-h marks the current and the following paragraphs; | |
291 if the arg is negative, it marks the current and the preceding | |
292 paragraphs. | |
293 | |
294 +++ | |
295 ** Some commands do something special in Transient Mark mode when the | |
296 mark is active--for instance, they limit their operation to the | |
297 region. Even if you don't normally use Transient Mark mode, you might | |
298 want to get this behavior from a particular command. There are two | |
299 ways you can enable Transient Mark mode and activate the mark, for one | |
300 command only. | |
301 | |
302 One method is to type C-SPC C-SPC; this enables Transient Mark mode | |
303 and sets the mark at point. The other method is to type C-u C-x C-x. | |
304 This enables Transient Mark mode temporarily but does not alter the | |
305 mark or the region. | |
306 | |
307 After these commands, Transient Mark mode remains enabled until you | |
308 deactivate the mark. That typically happens when you type a command | |
309 that alters the buffer, but you can also deactivate the mark by typing | |
310 C-g. | |
311 | |
312 +++ | |
313 ** find-file-read-only visits multiple files in read-only mode, | |
314 when the file name contains wildcard characters. | |
315 | |
316 +++ | |
317 ** find-alternate-file replaces the current file with multiple files, | |
318 when the file name contains wildcard characters. | |
319 | |
320 +++ | |
321 ** Auto Compression mode is now enabled by default. | |
322 | |
323 --- | |
324 ** C-x C-f RET, typing nothing in the minibuffer, is no longer a special case. | |
325 | |
326 Since the default input is the current directory, this has the effect | |
327 of specifying the current directory. Normally that means to visit the | |
328 directory with Dired. | |
329 | |
330 +++ | |
331 ** When you are root, and you visit a file whose modes specify | |
332 read-only, the Emacs buffer is now read-only too. Type C-x C-q if you | |
333 want to make the buffer writable. (As root, you can in fact alter the | |
334 file.) | |
335 | |
336 +++ | |
337 ** C-x s (save-some-buffers) now offers an option `d' to diff a buffer | |
338 against its file, so you can see what changes you would be saving. | |
339 | |
340 +++ | |
341 ** The commands copy-file, rename-file, make-symbolic-link and | |
342 add-name-to-file, when given a directory as the "new name" argument, | |
343 convert it to a file name by merging in the within-directory part of | |
344 the existing file's name. (This is the same convention that shell | |
345 commands cp, mv, and ln follow.) Thus, M-x copy-file RET ~/foo RET | |
346 /tmp RET copies ~/foo to /tmp/foo. | |
347 | |
348 --- | |
349 ** When used interactively, `format-write-file' now asks for confirmation | |
350 before overwriting an existing file, unless a prefix argument is | |
351 supplied. This behavior is analogous to `write-file'. | |
352 | |
353 --- | |
354 ** The variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms' now has a third element that | |
355 controls whether or not the function `make-auto-save-file-name' will | |
356 attempt to construct a unique auto-save name (e.g. for remote files). | |
357 | |
358 +++ | |
359 ** The max size of buffers and integers has been doubled. | |
360 On 32bit machines, it is now 256M (i.e. 268435455). | |
361 | |
362 +++ | |
363 ** If the user visits a file larger than `large-file-warning-threshold', | |
364 Emacs prompts her for confirmation. | |
365 | |
366 +++ | |
367 ** There's a new face `minibuffer-prompt'. | |
368 Emacs adds this face to the list of text properties stored in the | |
369 variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', which is used to display the | |
370 prompt string. | |
371 | |
372 --- | |
373 ** Enhanced visual feedback in *Completions* buffer. | |
374 | |
375 Completions lists use faces to highlight what all completions | |
376 have in common and where they begin to differ. | |
377 | |
378 The common prefix shared by all possible completions uses the face | |
379 `completions-common-part', while the first character that isn't the | |
380 same uses the face `completions-first-difference'. By default, | |
381 `completions-common-part' inherits from `default', and | |
382 `completions-first-difference' inherits from `bold'. The idea of | |
383 `completions-common-part' is that you can use it to make the common | |
384 parts less visible than normal, so that the rest of the differing | |
385 parts is, by contrast, slightly highlighted. | |
386 | |
387 +++ | |
388 ** File-name completion can now ignore directories. | |
389 If an element of the list in `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a | |
390 slash `/', it indicates a subdirectory that should be ignored when | |
391 completing file names. Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions' | |
392 which do not end in a slash are never considered when a completion | |
393 candidate is a directory. | |
394 | |
395 +++ | |
396 ** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only | |
397 to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point, | |
398 it remains unchanged. | |
399 | |
400 +++ | |
401 ** New user option `history-delete-duplicates'. | |
402 If set to t when adding a new history element, all previous identical | |
403 elements are deleted. | |
404 | |
405 +++ | |
406 ** You can now customize fill-nobreak-predicate to control where | |
407 filling can break lines. The value is now normally a list of | |
408 functions, but it can also be a single function, for compatibility. | |
409 | |
410 We provide two sample predicates, fill-single-word-nobreak-p and | |
411 fill-french-nobreak-p, for use in the value of fill-nobreak-predicate. | |
412 | |
413 +++ | |
414 ** require-final-newline now has two new possible values: | |
415 | |
416 `visit' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's needed | |
417 when visiting the file. | |
418 | |
419 `visit-save' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's | |
420 needed when visiting the file, and also add a newline if it's needed | |
421 when saving the file. | |
422 | |
423 +++ | |
424 ** The new option mode-require-final-newline controls how certain | |
425 major modes enable require-final-newline. Any major mode that's | |
426 designed for a kind of file that should normally end in a newline | |
427 sets require-final-newline based on mode-require-final-newline. | |
428 So you can customize mode-require-final-newline to control what these | |
429 modes do. | |
430 | |
431 +++ | |
432 ** Control characters and escape glyphs are now shown in the new | |
433 escape-glyph face. | |
434 | |
435 +++ | |
436 ** Non-breaking space and hyphens are now prefixed with an escape | |
437 character, unless the new user variable `show-nonbreak-escape' is set | |
438 to nil. | |
439 | |
440 +++ | |
441 ** In graphical mode, with a C program, GUD Tooltips have been extended to | |
442 display the #define directive associated with an identifier when program is | |
443 not executing. | |
444 | |
111 ** Moving or scrolling through images (and other lines) taller that | 445 ** Moving or scrolling through images (and other lines) taller that |
112 the window now works sensible, by automatically adjusting the window's | 446 the window now works sensible, by automatically adjusting the window's |
113 vscroll property. | 447 vscroll property. |
114 | 448 |
115 +++ | 449 +++ |
116 ** In graphical mode, with a C program, GUD Tooltips have been extended to | 450 ** font-lock-lines-before specifies a number of lines before the |
117 display the #define directive associated with an identifier when program is | 451 current line that should be refontified when you change the buffer. |
118 not executing. | 452 The default value is 1. |
119 | 453 |
120 +++ | 454 --- |
121 ** `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' has been renamed | 455 ** JIT-lock changes |
122 `comint-use-prompt-regexp'. The old name has been kept as an alias, | 456 |
123 but declared obsolete. | 457 *** The default settings for JIT stealth lock parameters are changed. |
124 | 458 The default value for the user option jit-lock-stealth-time is now 16 |
125 ** Improved key bindings support when running in an xterm. | 459 instead of 3, and the default value of jit-lock-stealth-nice is now |
126 When emacs is running in an xterm more key bindings are available. The | 460 0.5 instead of 0.125. The new defaults should lower the CPU usage |
127 following should work: | 461 when Emacs is fontifying in the background. |
128 {C,S,C-S,A}-{right,left,up,down,prior,next,delete,insert,F1-12}. | 462 |
129 These key bindings work on xterm from X.org 6.8, they might not work on | 463 |
130 some older versions of xterm, or on some proprietary versions. | 464 *** jit-lock can now be delayed with `jit-lock-defer-time'. |
131 | 465 |
466 If this variable is non-nil, its value should be the amount of Emacs | |
467 idle time in seconds to wait before starting fontification. For | |
468 example, if you set `jit-lock-defer-time' to 0.25, fontification will | |
469 only happen after 0.25s of idle time. | |
470 | |
471 *** contextual refontification is now separate from stealth fontification. | |
472 | |
473 jit-lock-defer-contextually is renamed jit-lock-contextually and | |
474 jit-lock-context-time determines the delay after which contextual | |
475 refontification takes place. | |
476 | |
477 +++ | |
478 ** line-move-ignore-invisible now defaults to t. | |
479 | |
480 --- | |
481 ** A menu item "Show/Hide" was added to the top-level menu "Options". | |
482 This menu allows you to turn various display features on and off (such | |
483 as the fringes, the tool bar, the speedbar, and the menu bar itself). | |
484 You can also move the vertical scroll bar to either side here or turn | |
485 it off completely. There is also a menu-item to toggle displaying of | |
486 current date and time, current line and column number in the | |
487 mode-line. | |
488 | |
489 --- | |
490 ** Speedbar has moved from the "Tools" top level menu to "Show/Hide". | |
491 | |
492 +++ | |
493 ** On X, MS Windows, and Mac OS, the blinking cursor's "off" state is | |
494 now controlled by the variable `blink-cursor-alist'. | |
495 | |
496 +++ | |
497 ** The X resource cursorBlink can be used to turn off cursor blinking. | |
498 | |
499 +++ | |
500 ** Emacs can produce an underscore-like (horizontal bar) cursor. | |
501 The underscore cursor is set by putting `(cursor-type . hbar)' in | |
502 default-frame-alist. It supports variable heights, like the `bar' | |
503 cursor does. | |
504 | |
505 +++ | |
506 ** Display of hollow cursors now obeys the buffer-local value (if any) | |
507 of `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' in the buffer that the cursor | |
508 appears in. | |
509 | |
510 +++ | |
511 ** The variable `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' can now be set to any | |
512 of the recognized cursor types. | |
513 | |
514 +++ | |
515 ** The new face `mode-line-inactive' is used to display the mode line | |
516 of non-selected windows. The `mode-line' face is now used to display | |
517 the mode line of the currently selected window. | |
518 | |
519 The new variable `mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' controls whether | |
520 the `mode-line-inactive' face is used. | |
521 | |
522 +++ | |
523 ** New display feature: focus follows the mouse from one Emacs window | |
524 to another, even within a frame. If you set the variable | |
525 mouse-autoselect-window to non-nil value, moving the mouse to a | |
526 different Emacs window will select that window (minibuffer window can | |
527 be selected only when it is active). The default is nil, so that this | |
528 feature is not enabled. | |
529 | |
530 +++ | |
531 ** On X, when the window manager requires that you click on a frame to | |
532 select it (give it focus), the selected window and cursor position | |
533 normally changes according to the mouse click position. If you set | |
534 the variable x-mouse-click-focus-ignore-position to t, the selected | |
535 window and cursor position do not change when you click on a frame | |
536 to give it focus. | |
537 | |
538 +++ | |
539 ** When you specify a frame size with --geometry, the size applies to | |
540 all frames you create. A position specified with --geometry only | |
541 affects the initial frame. | |
542 | |
543 +++ | |
544 ** You can now customize the use of window fringes. To control this | |
545 for all frames, use M-x fringe-mode or the Show/Hide submenu of the | |
546 top-level Options menu, or customize the `fringe-mode' variable. To | |
547 control this for a specific frame, use the command M-x | |
548 set-fringe-style. | |
549 | |
550 +++ | |
551 ** The buffer boundaries (i.e. first and last line in the buffer) may | |
552 now be marked with angle bitmaps in the fringes. In addition, up and | |
553 down arrow bitmaps may be shown at the top and bottom of the left or | |
554 right fringe if the window can be scrolled in either direction. | |
555 | |
556 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | |
557 `indicate-buffer-boundaries' to a non-nil value. The default value of | |
558 this variable is found in `default-indicate-buffer-boundaries'. | |
559 | |
560 If value is `left' or `right', both angle and arrow bitmaps are | |
561 displayed in the left or right fringe, resp. | |
562 | |
563 Value may also be an alist which specifies the presense and position | |
564 of each bitmap individually. | |
565 | |
566 For example, ((top . left) (t . right)) places the top angle bitmap | |
567 in left fringe, the bottom angle bitmap in right fringe, and both | |
568 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show just the angle bitmaps in the | |
569 left fringe, but no arrow bitmaps, use ((top . left) (bottom . left)). | |
570 | |
571 +++ | |
572 ** On window systems, lines which are exactly as wide as the window | |
573 (not counting the final newline character) are no longer broken into | |
574 two lines on the display (with just the newline on the second line). | |
575 Instead, the newline now "overflows" into the right fringe, and the | |
576 cursor will be displayed in the fringe when positioned on that newline. | |
577 | |
578 The new user option 'overflow-newline-into-fringe' may be set to nil to | |
579 revert to the old behavior of continuing such lines. | |
580 | |
581 +++ | |
582 ** When display margins are present in a window, the fringes are now | |
583 displayed between the margins and the buffer's text area, rather than | |
584 at the edges of the window. | |
585 | |
586 +++ | |
587 ** A window may now have individual fringe and scroll-bar settings, | |
588 in addition to the individual display margin settings. | |
589 | |
590 Such individual settings are now preserved when windows are split | |
591 horizontally or vertically, a saved window configuration is restored, | |
592 or when the frame is resized. | |
593 | |
594 +++ | |
595 ** `special-display-buffer-names' and `special-display-regexps' now | |
596 understand two new boolean pseudo-frame-parameters `same-frame' and | |
597 `same-window'. | |
598 | |
599 +++ | |
600 ** Changes in C-h bindings: | |
601 | |
602 C-h e displays the *Messages* buffer. | |
603 | |
604 C-h followed by a control character is used for displaying files | |
605 that do not change: | |
606 | |
607 C-h C-f displays the FAQ. | |
608 C-h C-e displays the PROBLEMS file. | |
609 | |
610 The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i | |
611 have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S. | |
612 | |
613 C-h c, C-h k, C-h w, and C-h f now handle remapped interactive commands. | |
614 | |
615 - C-h c and C-h k report the actual command (after possible remapping) | |
616 run by the key sequence. | |
617 | |
618 - C-h w and C-h f on a command which has been remapped now report the | |
619 command it is remapped to, and the keys which can be used to run | |
620 that command. | |
621 | |
622 For example, if C-k is bound to kill-line, and kill-line is remapped | |
623 to new-kill-line, these commands now report: | |
624 | |
625 - C-h c and C-h k C-k reports: | |
626 C-k runs the command new-kill-line | |
627 | |
628 - C-h w and C-h f kill-line reports: | |
629 kill-line is remapped to new-kill-line which is on C-k, <deleteline> | |
630 | |
631 - C-h w and C-h f new-kill-line reports: | |
632 new-kill-line is on C-k | |
633 | |
634 --- | |
635 ** Help commands `describe-function' and `describe-key' now show function | |
636 arguments in lowercase italics on displays that support it. To change the | |
637 default, customize face `help-argument-name' or redefine the function | |
638 `help-default-arg-highlight'. | |
639 | |
640 +++ | |
641 ** C-h v and C-h f commands now include a hyperlink to the C source for | |
642 variables and functions defined in C (if the C source is available). | |
643 | |
644 +++ | |
645 ** Help mode now only makes hyperlinks for faces when the face name is | |
646 preceded or followed by the word `face'. It no longer makes | |
647 hyperlinks for variables without variable documentation, unless | |
648 preceded by one of the words `variable' or `option'. It now makes | |
649 hyperlinks to Info anchors (or nodes) if the anchor (or node) name is | |
650 enclosed in single quotes and preceded by `info anchor' or `Info | |
651 anchor' (in addition to earlier `info node' and `Info node'). | |
652 | |
653 +++ | |
654 ** The new command `describe-char' (C-u C-x =) pops up a buffer with | |
655 description various information about a character, including its | |
656 encodings and syntax, its text properties, how to input, overlays, and | |
657 widgets at point. You can get more information about some of them, by | |
658 clicking on mouse-sensitive areas or moving there and pressing RET. | |
659 | |
660 +++ | |
661 ** New command `display-local-help' displays any local help at point | |
662 in the echo area. It is bound to `C-h .'. It normally displays the | |
663 same string that would be displayed on mouse-over using the | |
664 `help-echo' property, but, in certain cases, it can display a more | |
665 keyboard oriented alternative. | |
666 | |
667 --- | |
668 ** New commands `scan-buf-next-region' and `scan-buf-previous-region' | |
669 move to the start of the next (previous, respectively) region with | |
670 non-nil help-echo property and display any help found there in the | |
671 echo area, using `display-local-help'. | |
672 | |
673 +++ | |
674 ** New user option `help-at-pt-display-when-idle' allows to | |
675 automatically show the help provided by `display-local-help' on | |
676 point-over, after suitable idle time. The amount of idle time is | |
677 determined by the user option `help-at-pt-timer-delay' and defaults | |
678 to one second. This feature is turned off by default. | |
679 | |
680 --- | |
681 ** New commands to operate on pairs of open and close characters: | |
682 `insert-pair', `delete-pair', `raise-sexp'. | |
683 | |
684 +++ | |
685 ** In processing a local variables list, Emacs strips the prefix and | |
686 suffix are from every line before processing all the lines. | |
687 | |
688 +++ | |
689 ** `apply-macro-to-region-lines' now operates on all lines that begin | |
690 in the region, rather than on all complete lines in the region. | |
691 | |
692 +++ | |
693 ** You can now follow links by clicking Mouse-1 on the link. | |
694 | |
695 Traditionally, Emacs uses a Mouse-1 click to set point and a Mouse-2 | |
696 click to follow a link, whereas most other applications use a Mouse-1 | |
697 click for both purposes, depending on whether you click outside or | |
698 inside a link. Now the behavior of a Mouse-1 click has been changed | |
699 to match this context-sentitive dual behavior. | |
700 | |
701 Depending on the current mode, a Mouse-2 click in Emacs may do much | |
702 more than just follow a link, so the new Mouse-1 behavior is only | |
703 activated for modes which explicitly mark a clickable text as a "link" | |
704 (see the new function `mouse-on-link-p' for details). The Lisp | |
705 packages that are included in release 22.1 have been adapted to do | |
706 this, but external packages may not yet support this. However, there | |
707 is no risk in using such packages, as the worst thing that could | |
708 happen is that you get the original Mouse-1 behavior when you click | |
709 on a link, which typically means that you set point where you click. | |
710 | |
711 If you want to get the original Mouse-1 action also inside a link, you | |
712 just need to press the Mouse-1 button a little longer than a normal | |
713 click (i.e. press and hold the Mouse-1 button for half a second before | |
714 you release it). | |
715 | |
716 Dragging the Mouse-1 inside a link still performs the original | |
717 drag-mouse-1 action, typically copy the text. | |
718 | |
719 You can customize the new Mouse-1 behavior via the new user options | |
720 `mouse-1-click-follows-link' and `mouse-1-click-in-non-selected-windows'. | |
721 | |
722 +++ | |
723 ** Emacs normally highlights mouse sensitive text whenever the mouse | |
724 is over the text. By setting the new variable `mouse-highlight', you | |
725 can optionally enable mouse highlighting only after you move the | |
726 mouse, so that highlighting disappears when you press a key. You can | |
727 also disable mouse highlighting. | |
728 | |
729 +++ | |
730 ** You can now customize if selecting a region by dragging the mouse | |
731 shall not copy the selected text to the kill-ring by setting the new | |
732 variable mouse-drag-copy-region to nil. | |
733 | |
734 --- | |
735 ** mouse-wheels can now scroll a specific fraction of the window | |
736 (rather than a fixed number of lines) and the scrolling is `progressive'. | |
737 | |
738 --- | |
739 ** Unexpected yanking of text due to accidental clicking on the mouse | |
740 wheel button (typically mouse-2) during wheel scrolling is now avoided. | |
741 This behavior can be customized via the mouse-wheel-click-event and | |
742 mouse-wheel-inhibit-click-time variables. | |
743 | |
744 +++ | |
745 ** Under X, mouse-wheel-mode is turned on by default. | |
746 | |
747 +++ | |
748 ** M-x setenv now expands environment variables of the form `$foo' and | |
749 `${foo}' in the specified new value of the environment variable. To | |
750 include a `$' in the value, use `$$'. | |
751 | |
752 +++ | |
753 ** Unquoted `$' in file names do not signal an error any more when | |
754 the corresponding environment variable does not exist. | |
755 Instead, the `$ENVVAR' text is left as is, so that `$$' quoting | |
756 is only rarely needed. | |
757 | |
758 --- | |
759 ** Language environment and various default coding systems are setup | |
760 more correctly according to the current locale name. If the locale | |
761 name doesn't specify a charset, the default is what glibc defines. | |
762 This change may result in using the different coding systems as | |
763 default in some locale (e.g. vi_VN). | |
764 | |
765 +++ | |
766 ** The default for the paper size (variable ps-paper-type) is taken | |
767 from the locale. | |
768 | |
769 +++ | |
770 ** The keyboard-coding-system is now automatically set based on your | |
771 current locale settings if you are not using a window system. This | |
772 may mean that the META key doesn't work but generates non-ASCII | |
773 characters instead, depending on how the terminal (or terminal | |
774 emulator) works. Use `set-keyboard-coding-system' (or customize | |
775 keyboard-coding-system) if you prefer META to work (the old default) | |
776 or if the locale doesn't describe the character set actually generated | |
777 by the keyboard. See Info node `Single-Byte Character Support'. | |
778 | |
779 +++ | |
780 ** The new command `revert-buffer-with-coding-system' (C-x RET r) | |
781 revisits the current file using a coding system that you specify. | |
782 | |
783 +++ | |
784 ** New command `recode-region' decodes the region again by a specified | |
785 coding system. | |
786 | |
787 +++ | |
788 ** The new command `recode-file-name' changes the encoding of the name | |
789 of a file. | |
790 | |
791 --- | |
792 ** New command `ucs-insert' inserts a character specified by its | |
793 unicode. | |
794 | |
795 +++ | |
796 ** The new command `set-file-name-coding-system' (C-x RET F) sets | |
797 coding system for encoding and decoding file names. A new menu item | |
798 (Options->Mule->Set Coding Systems->For File Name) invokes this | |
799 command. | |
800 | |
801 +++ | |
802 ** New command quail-show-key shows what key (or key sequence) to type | |
803 in the current input method to input a character at point. | |
804 | |
805 +++ | |
806 ** Limited support for character `unification' has been added. | |
807 Emacs now knows how to translate between different representations of | |
808 the same characters in various Emacs charsets according to standard | |
809 Unicode mappings. This applies mainly to characters in the ISO 8859 | |
810 sets plus some other 8-bit sets, but can be extended. For instance, | |
811 translation works amongst the Emacs ...-iso8859-... charsets and the | |
812 mule-unicode-... ones. | |
813 | |
814 By default this translation happens automatically on encoding. | |
815 Self-inserting characters are translated to make the input conformant | |
816 with the encoding of the buffer in which it's being used, where | |
817 possible. | |
818 | |
819 You can force a more complete unification with the user option | |
820 unify-8859-on-decoding-mode. That maps all the Latin-N character sets | |
821 into Unicode characters (from the latin-iso8859-1 and | |
822 mule-unicode-0100-24ff charsets) on decoding. Note that this mode | |
823 will often effectively clobber data with an iso-2022 encoding. | |
824 | |
825 --- | |
826 ** There is support for decoding Greek and Cyrillic characters into | |
827 either Unicode (the mule-unicode charsets) or the iso-8859 charsets, | |
828 when possible. The latter are more space-efficient. This is | |
829 controlled by user option utf-fragment-on-decoding. | |
830 | |
831 --- | |
832 ** New language environments: French, Ukrainian, Tajik, | |
833 Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, UTF-8, Windows-1255, Welsh, Latin-6, | |
834 Latin-7, Lithuanian, Latvian, Swedish, Slovenian, Croatian, Georgian, | |
835 Italian, Russian, Malayalam, Tamil, Russian, Chinese-EUC-TW. (Set up | |
836 automatically according to the locale.) | |
837 | |
838 --- | |
839 ** New input methods: latin-alt-postfix, latin-postfix, latin-prefix, | |
840 ukrainian-computer, belarusian, bulgarian-bds, russian-computer, | |
841 vietnamese-telex, lithuanian-numeric, lithuanian-keyboard, | |
842 latvian-keyboard, welsh, georgian, rfc1345, ucs, sgml, | |
843 bulgarian-phonetic, dutch, slovenian, croatian, malayalam-inscript, | |
844 tamil-inscript. | |
845 | |
846 --- | |
847 ** New input method chinese-sisheng for inputting Chinese Pinyin | |
848 characters. | |
849 | |
850 --- | |
132 ** Improved Thai support. A new minor mode `thai-word-mode' (which is | 851 ** Improved Thai support. A new minor mode `thai-word-mode' (which is |
133 automatically activated if you select Thai as a language | 852 automatically activated if you select Thai as a language |
134 environment) changes key bindings of most word-oriented commands to | 853 environment) changes key bindings of most word-oriented commands to |
135 versions which recognize Thai words. Affected commands are | 854 versions which recognize Thai words. Affected commands are |
136 M-f (forward-word) | 855 M-f (forward-word) |
138 M-d (kill-word) | 857 M-d (kill-word) |
139 M-DEL (backward-kill-word) | 858 M-DEL (backward-kill-word) |
140 M-t (transpose-words) | 859 M-t (transpose-words) |
141 M-q (fill-paragraph) | 860 M-q (fill-paragraph) |
142 | 861 |
143 +++ | 862 --- |
144 ** Auto Compression mode is now enabled by default. | 863 ** Indian support has been updated. |
145 | 864 The in-is13194 coding system is now Unicode-based. CDAC fonts are |
146 ** C-x C-f RET, typing nothing in the minibuffer, is no longer a special case. | 865 assumed. There is a framework for supporting various |
147 | 866 Indian scripts, but currently only Devanagari, Malayalam and Tamil are |
148 Since the default input is the current directory, this has the effect | 867 supported. |
149 of specifying the current directory. Normally that means to visit the | 868 |
150 directory with Dired. | 869 --- |
151 | 870 ** A UTF-7 coding system is available in the library `utf-7'. |
152 --- | 871 |
153 ** fast-lock.el and lazy-lock.el are obsolete. Use jit-lock.el instead. | 872 --- |
154 | 873 ** The utf-8/16 coding systems have been enhanced. |
155 --- | 874 By default, untranslatable utf-8 sequences are simply composed into |
156 ** The default settings for JIT stealth lock parameters are changed. | 875 single quasi-characters. User option `utf-translate-cjk-mode' (it is |
157 The default value for the user option jit-lock-stealth-time is now 16 | 876 turned on by default) arranges to translate many utf-8 CJK character |
158 instead of 3, and the default value of jit-lock-stealth-nice is now | 877 sequences into real Emacs characters in a similar way to the Mule-UCS |
159 0.5 instead of 0.125. The new defaults should lower the CPU usage | 878 system. As this loads a fairly big data on demand, people who are not |
160 when Emacs is fontifying in the background. | 879 interested in CJK characters may want to customize it to nil. |
161 | 880 You can augment/amend the CJK translation via hash tables |
162 --- | 881 `ucs-mule-cjk-to-unicode' and `ucs-unicode-to-mule-cjk'. The utf-8 |
163 ** iso-acc.el is now obsolete. Use one of the latin input methods instead. | 882 coding system now also encodes characters from most of Emacs's |
164 | 883 one-dimensional internal charsets, specifically the ISO-8859 ones. |
165 --- | 884 The utf-16 coding system is affected similarly. |
166 ** Language environment and various default coding systems are setup | 885 |
167 more correctly according to the current locale name. If the locale | 886 --- |
168 name doesn't specify a charset, the default is what glibc defines. | 887 ** A new coding system `euc-tw' has been added for traditional Chinese |
169 This change may result in using the different coding systems as | 888 in CNS encoding; it accepts both Big 5 and CNS as input; on saving, |
170 default in some locale (e.g. vi_VN). | 889 Big 5 is then converted to CNS. |
171 | 890 |
172 +++ | 891 --- |
173 ** The commands copy-file, rename-file, make-symbolic-link and | 892 ** Many new coding systems are available by loading the `code-pages' |
174 add-name-to-file, when given a directory as the "new name" argument, | 893 library. These include complete versions of most of those in |
175 convert it to a file name by merging in the within-directory part of | 894 codepage.el, based on Unicode mappings. `codepage-setup' is now |
176 the existing file's name. (This is the same convention that shell | 895 obsolete and is used only in the MS-DOS port of Emacs. windows-1252 |
177 commands cp, mv, and ln follow.) Thus, M-x copy-file RET ~/foo RET | 896 and windows-1251 are preloaded since the former is so common and the |
178 /tmp RET copies ~/foo to /tmp/foo. | 897 latter is used by GNU locales. |
179 | 898 |
180 +++ | 899 --- |
181 ** M-o now is the prefix key for setting text properties; | 900 ** New variable `utf-translate-cjk-unicode-range' controls which |
182 M-o M-o requests refontification. | 901 Unicode characters to translate in `utf-translate-cjk-mode'. |
183 | 902 |
184 +++ | 903 --- |
185 ** M-g is now a prefix key. | 904 ** iso-10646-1 (`Unicode') fonts can be used to display any range of |
186 | 905 characters encodable by the utf-8 coding system. Just specify the |
187 M-g g and M-g M-g run goto-line. | 906 fontset appropriately. |
188 M-g n and M-g M-n run next-error (like C-x `). | 907 |
189 M-g p and M-g M-p run previous-error. | 908 +++ |
190 | 909 ** Vertical scrolling is now possible within incremental search. |
191 +++ | 910 To enable this feature, customize the new user option |
192 ** font-lock-lines-before specifies a number of lines before the | 911 `isearch-allow-scroll'. User written commands which satisfy stringent |
193 current line that should be refontified when you change the buffer. | 912 constraints can be marked as "scrolling commands". See the Emacs manual |
194 The default value is 1. | 913 for details. |
195 | 914 |
196 +++ | 915 +++ |
197 ** C-u M-x goto-line now switches to the most recent previous buffer, | 916 ** C-w in incremental search now grabs either a character or a word, |
198 and goes to the specified line in that buffer. | 917 making the decision in a heuristic way. This new job is done by the |
199 | 918 command `isearch-yank-word-or-char'. To restore the old behavior, |
200 When goto-line starts to execute, if there's a number in the buffer at | 919 bind C-w to `isearch-yank-word' in `isearch-mode-map'. |
201 point then it acts as the default argument for the minibuffer. | 920 |
202 | 921 +++ |
203 --- | 922 ** C-y in incremental search now grabs the next line if point is already |
204 ** Emacs now responds to mouse-clicks on the mode-line, header-line and | 923 at the end of a line. |
205 display margin, when run in an xterm. | 924 |
206 | 925 +++ |
207 +++ | 926 ** C-M-w deletes and C-M-y grabs a character in isearch mode. |
208 ** M-SPC (just-one-space) when given a numeric argument N | 927 Another method to grab a character is to enter the minibuffer by `M-e' |
209 converts whitespace around point to N spaces. | 928 and to type `C-f' at the end of the search string in the minibuffer. |
210 | 929 |
211 +++ | 930 +++ |
212 ** Control characters and escape glyphs are now shown in the new | 931 ** M-% typed in isearch mode invokes `query-replace' or |
213 escape-glyph face. | 932 `query-replace-regexp' (depending on search mode) with the current |
214 | 933 search string used as the string to replace. |
215 +++ | 934 |
216 ** Non-breaking space and hyphens are now prefixed with an escape | 935 +++ |
217 character, unless the new user variable `show-nonbreak-escape' is set | 936 ** Isearch no longer adds `isearch-resume' commands to the command |
218 to nil. | 937 history by default. To enable this feature, customize the new |
219 | 938 user option `isearch-resume-in-command-history'. |
220 --- | 939 |
221 ** The type-break package now allows `type-break-file-name' to be nil | 940 --- |
222 and if so, doesn't store any data across sessions. This is handy if | 941 ** New user option `query-replace-skip-read-only': when non-nil, |
223 you don't want the .type-break file in your home directory or are | 942 `query-replace' and related functions simply ignore |
224 annoyed by the need for interaction when you kill Emacs. | 943 a match if part of it has a read-only property. |
225 | 944 |
226 --- | 945 +++ |
227 ** display-battery has been replaced by display-battery-mode. | 946 ** When used interactively, the commands `query-replace-regexp' and |
228 | 947 `replace-regexp' allow \,expr to be used in a replacement string, |
229 --- | 948 where expr is an arbitrary Lisp expression evaluated at replacement |
230 ** calculator.el now has radix grouping mode, which is available when | 949 time. In many cases, this will be more convenient than using |
231 `calculator-output-radix' is non-nil. In this mode a separator | 950 `query-replace-regexp-eval'. `\#' in a replacement string now refers |
232 character is used every few digits, making it easier to see byte | 951 to the count of replacements already made by the replacement command. |
233 boundries etc. For more info, see the documentation of the variable | 952 All regular expression replacement commands now allow `\?' in the |
234 `calculator-radix-grouping-mode'. | 953 replacement string to specify a position where the replacement string |
235 | 954 can be edited for each replacement. |
236 +++ | 955 |
237 ** You can now follow links by clicking Mouse-1 on the link. | 956 +++ |
238 | 957 ** query-replace uses isearch lazy highlighting when the new user option |
239 Traditionally, Emacs uses a Mouse-1 click to set point and a Mouse-2 | 958 `query-replace-lazy-highlight' is non-nil. |
240 click to follow a link, whereas most other applications use a Mouse-1 | 959 |
241 click for both purposes, depending on whether you click outside or | 960 --- |
242 inside a link. Now the behavior of a Mouse-1 click has been changed | 961 ** The current match in query-replace is highlighted in new face |
243 to match this context-sentitive dual behavior. | 962 `query-replace' which by default inherits from isearch face. |
244 | 963 |
245 Depending on the current mode, a Mouse-2 click in Emacs may do much | 964 +++ |
246 more than just follow a link, so the new Mouse-1 behavior is only | 965 ** M-x compare-windows now can automatically skip non-matching text to |
247 activated for modes which explicitly mark a clickable text as a "link" | 966 resync points in both windows. |
248 (see the new function `mouse-on-link-p' for details). The Lisp | 967 |
249 packages that are included in release 22.1 have been adapted to do | 968 +++ |
250 this, but external packages may not yet support this. However, there | 969 ** The commands M-x customize-face and M-x customize-face-other-window |
251 is no risk in using such packages, as the worst thing that could | 970 now look at the character after point. If a face or faces are |
252 happen is that you get the original Mouse-1 behavior when you click | 971 specified for that character, the commands by default customize those |
253 on a link, which typically means that you set point where you click. | 972 faces. |
254 | 973 |
255 If you want to get the original Mouse-1 action also inside a link, you | 974 --- |
256 just need to press the Mouse-1 button a little longer than a normal | 975 ** The face-customization widget has been reworked to be less confusing. |
257 click (i.e. press and hold the Mouse-1 button for half a second before | 976 In particular, when you enable a face attribute using the corresponding |
258 you release it). | 977 check-box, there's no longer a redundant `*' option in value selection |
259 | 978 for that attribute; the values you can choose are only those which make |
260 Dragging the Mouse-1 inside a link still performs the original | 979 sense for the attribute. When an attribute is de-selected by unchecking |
261 drag-mouse-1 action, typically copy the text. | 980 its check-box, then the (now ignored, but still present temporarily in |
262 | 981 case you re-select the attribute) value is hidden. |
263 You can customize the new Mouse-1 behavior via the new user options | 982 |
264 `mouse-1-click-follows-link' and `mouse-1-click-in-non-selected-windows'. | 983 +++ |
265 | 984 ** When you set or reset a variable's value in a Customize buffer, |
266 +++ | 985 the previous value becomes the "backup value" of the variable. |
267 ** require-final-newline now has two new possible values: | 986 You can go back to that backup value by selecting "Use Backup Value" |
268 | 987 under the "[State]" button. |
269 `visit' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's needed | 988 |
270 when visiting the file. | 989 ** Dired mode: |
271 | 990 |
272 `visit-save' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's | 991 --- |
273 needed when visiting the file, and also add a newline if it's needed | 992 *** New faces dired-header, dired-mark, dired-marked, dired-flagged, |
274 when saving the file. | 993 dired-ignored, dired-directory, dired-symlink, dired-warning |
275 | 994 introduced for Dired mode instead of font-lock faces. |
276 +++ | 995 |
277 ** The new option mode-require-final-newline controls how certain | 996 +++ |
278 major modes enable require-final-newline. Any major mode that's | 997 *** New Dired command `dired-compare-directories' marks files |
279 designed for a kind of file that should normally end in a newline | 998 with different file attributes in two dired buffers. |
280 sets require-final-newline based on mode-require-final-newline. | 999 |
281 So you can customize mode-require-final-newline to control what these | 1000 +++ |
282 modes do. | 1001 *** New Dired command `dired-do-touch' (bound to T) changes timestamps |
283 | 1002 of marked files with the value entered in the minibuffer. |
284 +++ | 1003 |
285 ** When the undo information of the current command gets really large | 1004 +++ |
286 (beyond the value of `undo-outer-limit'), Emacs discards it and warns | 1005 *** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now |
287 you about it. | 1006 control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded |
288 | 1007 by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards |
289 +++ | 1008 too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the |
290 ** line-move-ignore-invisible now defaults to t. | 1009 doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent |
1010 special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'. | |
1011 | |
1012 +++ | |
1013 *** In Dired, the w command now copies the current line's file name | |
1014 into the kill ring. With a zero prefix arg, copies absolute file names. | |
1015 | |
1016 +++ | |
1017 ** The variables dired-free-space-program and dired-free-space-args | |
1018 have been renamed to directory-free-space-program and | |
1019 directory-free-space-args, and they now apply whenever Emacs puts a | |
1020 directory listing into a buffer. | |
1021 | |
1022 +++ | |
1023 ** Dired-x: | |
1024 | |
1025 +++ | |
1026 *** Omitting files is now a minor mode, dired-omit-mode. The mode toggling | |
1027 command is bound to M-o. A new command dired-mark-omitted, bound to * O, | |
1028 marks omitted files. The variable dired-omit-files-p is obsoleted, use the | |
1029 mode toggling function instead. | |
291 | 1030 |
292 +++ | 1031 +++ |
293 ** In Outline mode, hide-body no longer hides lines at the top | 1032 ** In Outline mode, hide-body no longer hides lines at the top |
294 of the file that precede the first header line. | 1033 of the file that precede the first header line. |
295 | 1034 |
296 +++ | 1035 +++ |
297 ** In Enriched mode, `set-left-margin' and `set-right-margin' are now | 1036 ** Occur, Info, and comint-derived modes now support using |
298 by default bound to `C-c [' and `C-c ]' instead of the former `C-c C-l' | 1037 M-x font-lock-mode to toggle fontification. The variable |
299 and `C-c C-r'. | 1038 `Info-fontify' is no longer applicable; to disable fontification, |
300 | 1039 remove `turn-on-font-lock' from `Info-mode-hook'. |
301 +++ | |
302 ** In processing a local variables list, Emacs strips the prefix and | |
303 suffix are from every line before processing all the lines. | |
304 | |
305 +++ | |
306 ** `apply-macro-to-region-lines' now operates on all lines that begin | |
307 in the region, rather than on all complete lines in the region. | |
308 | |
309 --- | |
310 ** global-whitespace-mode is a new alias for whitespace-global-mode. | |
311 | |
312 +++ | |
313 ** There are now two new regular expression operators, \_< and \_>, | |
314 for matching the beginning and end of a symbol. A symbol is a | |
315 non-empty sequence of either word or symbol constituent characters, as | |
316 specified by the syntax table. | |
317 --- | |
318 *** rx.el has new corresponding `symbol-end' and `symbol-start' elements. | |
319 | |
320 +++ | |
321 ** Passing resources on the command line now works on MS Windows. | |
322 You can use --xrm to pass resource settings to Emacs, overriding any | |
323 existing values. For example: | |
324 | |
325 emacs --xrm "Emacs.Background:red" --xrm "Emacs.Geometry:100x20" | |
326 | |
327 will start up Emacs on an initial frame of 100x20 with red background, | |
328 irrespective of geometry or background setting on the Windows registry. | |
329 | 1040 |
330 --- | 1041 --- |
331 ** The terminal emulation code in term.el has been improved, it can | 1042 ** The terminal emulation code in term.el has been improved, it can |
332 run most curses applications now. | 1043 run most curses applications now. |
333 | |
334 ** New features in evaluation commands | |
335 | |
336 +++ | |
337 *** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) called on defface reinitializes | |
338 the face to the value specified in the defface expression. | |
339 | |
340 +++ | |
341 *** Typing C-x C-e twice prints the value of the integer result | |
342 in additional formats (octal, hexadecimal, character) specified | |
343 by the new function `eval-expression-print-format'. The same | |
344 function also defines the result format for `eval-expression' (M-:), | |
345 `eval-print-last-sexp' (C-j) and some edebug evaluation functions. | |
346 | |
347 --- | |
348 ** New input method chinese-sisheng for inputting Chinese Pinyin | |
349 characters. | |
350 | |
351 +++ | |
352 ** New command quail-show-key shows what key (or key sequence) to type | |
353 in the current input method to input a character at point. | |
354 | |
355 +++ | |
356 ** You can now switch buffers in a cyclic order with C-x C-left and | |
357 (prev-buffer) and C-x C-right (next-buffer). C-x left and C-x right | |
358 can be used as well. | |
359 | |
360 --- | |
361 ** Commands winner-redo and winner-undo, from winner.el, are now bound to | |
362 C-c <left> and C-c <right>, respectively. This is an incompatible change. | |
363 | |
364 --- | |
365 ** Help commands `describe-function' and `describe-key' now show function | |
366 arguments in lowercase italics on displays that support it. To change the | |
367 default, customize face `help-argument-name' or redefine the function | |
368 `help-default-arg-highlight'. | |
369 | 1044 |
370 --- | 1045 --- |
371 ** The comint prompt can now be made read-only, using the new user | 1046 ** The comint prompt can now be made read-only, using the new user |
372 option `comint-prompt-read-only'. This is not enabled by default, | 1047 option `comint-prompt-read-only'. This is not enabled by default, |
373 except in IELM buffers. The read-only status of IELM prompts can be | 1048 except in IELM buffers. The read-only status of IELM prompts can be |
388 not the case, then `comint-kill-region' behaves just like | 1063 not the case, then `comint-kill-region' behaves just like |
389 `kill-region' if read-only are involved: it copies the text to the | 1064 `kill-region' if read-only are involved: it copies the text to the |
390 kill-ring, but does not delete it. | 1065 kill-ring, but does not delete it. |
391 | 1066 |
392 +++ | 1067 +++ |
1068 ** The new command `comint-insert-previous-argument' in comint-derived | |
1069 modes (shell-mode etc) inserts arguments from previous command lines, | |
1070 like bash's `ESC .' binding. It is bound by default to `C-c .', but | |
1071 otherwise behaves quite similarly to the bash version. | |
1072 | |
1073 ** `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' has been renamed | |
1074 `comint-use-prompt-regexp'. The old name has been kept as an alias, | |
1075 but declared obsolete. | |
1076 | |
1077 +++ | |
1078 ** Telnet now prompts you for a port number with C-u M-x telnet. | |
1079 | |
1080 --- | |
1081 ** M-x compile has become more robust and reliable | |
1082 | |
1083 Quite a few more kinds of messages are recognized. Messages that are | |
1084 recognized as warnings or informational come in orange or green, instead of | |
1085 red. Informational messages are by default skipped with `next-error' | |
1086 (controlled by `compilation-skip-threshold'). | |
1087 | |
1088 Location data is collected on the fly as the *compilation* buffer changes. | |
1089 This means you could modify messages to make them point to different files. | |
1090 This also means you can not go to locations of messages you may have deleted. | |
1091 | |
1092 The variable `compilation-error-regexp-alist' has now become customizable. If | |
1093 you had added your own regexps to this, you'll probably need to include a | |
1094 leading `^', otherwise they'll match anywhere on a line. There is now also a | |
1095 `compilation-mode-font-lock-keywords' and it nicely handles all the checks | |
1096 that configure outputs and -o options so you see at a glance where you are. | |
1097 | |
1098 The new file etc/compilation.txt gives examples of each type of message. | |
1099 | |
1100 ** Compilation mode enhancements: | |
1101 | |
1102 +++ | |
1103 *** New user option `compilation-environment'. | |
1104 This option allows you to specify environment variables for inferior | |
1105 compilation processes without affecting the environment that all | |
1106 subprocesses inherit. | |
1107 | |
1108 +++ | |
1109 ** Grep has been decoupled from compilation mode setup. | |
1110 | |
1111 --- | |
1112 *** There's a new separate package grep.el. | |
1113 | |
1114 --- | |
1115 *** M-x grep has been adapted to new compile | |
1116 | |
1117 Hits are fontified in green, and hits in binary files in orange. Grep buffers | |
1118 can be saved and automatically revisited with the new Grep mode. | |
1119 | |
1120 --- | |
1121 *** Grep commands now have their own submenu and customization group. | |
1122 | |
1123 +++ | |
1124 *** `grep-find' is now also available under the name `find-grep' where | |
1125 people knowing `find-grep-dired' would probably expect it. | |
1126 | |
1127 --- | |
1128 *** The new variables `grep-window-height', `grep-auto-highlight', and | |
1129 `grep-scroll-output' can be used to override the corresponding | |
1130 compilation mode settings for grep commands. | |
1131 | |
1132 +++ | |
1133 *** New option `grep-highlight-matches' highlightes matches in *grep* | |
1134 buffer. It uses a special feature of some grep programs which accept | |
1135 --color option to output markers around matches. When going to the next | |
1136 match with `next-error' the exact match is highlighted in the source | |
1137 buffer. Otherwise, if `grep-highlight-matches' is nil, the whole | |
1138 source line is highlighted. | |
1139 | |
1140 +++ | |
1141 *** New key bindings in grep output window: | |
1142 SPC and DEL scrolls window up and down. C-n and C-p moves to next and | |
1143 previous match in the grep window. RET jumps to the source line of | |
1144 the current match. `n' and `p' shows next and previous match in | |
1145 other window, but does not switch buffer. `{' and `}' jumps to the | |
1146 previous or next file in the grep output. TAB also jumps to the next | |
1147 file. | |
1148 | |
1149 +++ | |
1150 ** M-x grep now tries to avoid appending `/dev/null' to the command line | |
1151 by using GNU grep `-H' option instead. M-x grep automatically | |
1152 detects whether this is possible or not the first time it is invoked. | |
1153 When `-H' is used, the grep command line supplied by the user is passed | |
1154 unchanged to the system to execute, which allows more complicated | |
1155 command lines to be used than was possible before. | |
1156 | |
1157 +++ | |
1158 ** New options `next-error-highlight' and `next-error-highlight-no-select' | |
1159 specify the method of highlighting of the corresponding source line | |
1160 in new face `next-error'. | |
1161 | |
1162 +++ | |
1163 ** A new minor mode `next-error-follow-minor-mode' can be used in | |
1164 compilation-mode, grep-mode, occur-mode, and diff-mode (i.e. all the | |
1165 modes that can use `next-error'). In this mode, cursor motion in the | |
1166 buffer causes automatic display in another window of the corresponding | |
1167 matches, compilation errors, etc. This minor mode can be toggled with | |
1168 C-c C-f. | |
1169 | |
1170 +++ | |
1171 ** M-x diff uses diff-mode instead of compilation-mode. | |
1172 | |
1173 +++ | |
1174 ** In the *Occur* buffer, `o' switches to it in another window, and | |
1175 C-o displays the current line's occurrence in another window without | |
1176 switching to it. | |
1177 | |
1178 +++ | |
393 ** You can now use next-error (C-x `) and previous-error to advance to | 1179 ** You can now use next-error (C-x `) and previous-error to advance to |
394 the next/previous matching line found by M-x occur. | 1180 the next/previous matching line found by M-x occur. |
395 | 1181 |
396 +++ | 1182 +++ |
397 ** Telnet now prompts you for a port number with C-u M-x telnet. | 1183 ** The new command `multi-occur' is just like `occur', except it can |
398 | 1184 search multiple buffers. There is also a new command |
399 +++ | 1185 `multi-occur-by-filename-regexp' which allows you to specify the |
400 ** New command line option -Q or --quick. | 1186 buffers to search by their filename. Internally, Occur mode has been |
401 | 1187 rewritten, and now uses font-lock, among other changes. |
402 This is like using -q --no-site-file, but in addition it also disables | 1188 |
403 the fancy startup screen. | 1189 +++ |
404 | 1190 ** font-lock: in modes like C and Lisp where the fontification assumes that |
405 +++ | 1191 an open-paren in column 0 is always outside of any string or comment, |
406 ** New command line option -D or --basic-display. | 1192 font-lock now highlights any such open-paren-in-column-zero in bold-red |
407 | 1193 if it is inside a string or a comment, to indicate that it can cause |
408 Disables the menu-bar, the tool-bar, the scroll-bars, tool tips, and | 1194 trouble with fontification and/or indentation. |
409 the blinking cursor. | 1195 |
410 | 1196 ** Enhancements to apropos commands: |
411 +++ | 1197 |
412 ** New command line option -nbc or --no-blinking-cursor disables | 1198 +++ |
413 the blinking cursor on graphical terminals. | 1199 *** The apropos commands now accept a list of words to match. |
414 | 1200 When more than one word is specified, at least two of those words must |
415 +++ | 1201 be present for an item to match. Regular expression matching is still |
416 ** C-h v and C-h f commands now include a hyperlink to the C source for | 1202 available. |
417 variables and functions defined in C (if the C source is available). | 1203 |
418 | 1204 +++ |
419 --- | 1205 *** The new option `apropos-sort-by-scores' causes the matching items |
420 ** When used interactively, `format-write-file' now asks for confirmation | 1206 to be sorted according to their score. The score for an item is a |
421 before overwriting an existing file, unless a prefix argument is | 1207 number calculated to indicate how well the item matches the words or |
422 supplied. This behavior is analogous to `write-file'. | 1208 regular expression that you entered to the apropos command. The best |
1209 match is listed first, and the calculated score is shown for each | |
1210 matching item. | |
1211 | |
1212 +++ | |
1213 ** You can have several Emacs servers on the same machine. | |
1214 | |
1215 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "foo")' -f server-start & | |
1216 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "bar")' -f server-start & | |
1217 % emacsclient -s foo file1 | |
1218 % emacsclient -s bar file2 | |
1219 | |
1220 +++ | |
1221 ** The `emacsclient' command understands the options `--eval' and | |
1222 `--display' which tell Emacs respectively to evaluate the given elisp | |
1223 expression and to use the given display when visiting files. | |
1224 | |
1225 +++ | |
1226 ** User option `server-mode' can be used to start a server process. | |
1227 | |
1228 +++ | |
1229 ** New user option `add-log-always-start-new-record'. | |
1230 When this option is enabled, M-x add-change-log-entry always | |
1231 starts a new record regardless of when the last record is. | |
1232 | |
1233 ** Info mode: | |
1234 | |
1235 +++ | |
1236 *** A numeric prefix argument of `info' selects an Info buffer | |
1237 with the number appended to the *info* buffer name (e.g. "*info*<2>"). | |
1238 | |
1239 --- | |
1240 *** isearch in Info uses Info-search and searches through multiple nodes. | |
1241 Before leaving the initial Info node isearch fails once with the error | |
1242 message [initial node], and with subsequent C-s/C-r continues through | |
1243 other nodes. When isearch fails for the rest of the manual, it wraps | |
1244 aroung the whole manual to the top/final node. The user option | |
1245 `Info-isearch-search' controls whether to use Info-search for isearch, | |
1246 or the default isearch search function that wraps around the current | |
1247 Info node. | |
1248 | |
1249 *** New search commands: `Info-search-case-sensitively' (bound to S), | |
1250 `Info-search-backward', and `Info-search-next' which repeats the last | |
1251 search without prompting for a new search string. | |
1252 | |
1253 *** New command `Info-history-forward' (bound to r and new toolbar icon) | |
1254 moves forward in history to the node you returned from after using | |
1255 `Info-history-back' (renamed from `Info-last'). | |
1256 | |
1257 *** New command `Info-history' (bound to L) displays a menu of visited nodes. | |
1258 | |
1259 *** New command `Info-toc' (bound to T) creates a node with table of contents | |
1260 from the tree structure of menus of the current Info file. | |
1261 | |
1262 *** New command `info-apropos' searches the indices of the known | |
1263 Info files on your system for a string, and builds a menu of the | |
1264 possible matches. | |
1265 | |
1266 *** New command `Info-copy-current-node-name' (bound to w) copies | |
1267 the current Info node name into the kill ring. With a zero prefix | |
1268 arg, puts the node name inside the `info' function call. | |
1269 | |
1270 --- | |
1271 *** New face `info-xref-visited' distinguishes visited nodes from unvisited | |
1272 and a new option `Info-fontify-visited-nodes' to control this. | |
1273 | |
1274 *** http and ftp links in Info are now operational: they look like cross | |
1275 references and following them calls `browse-url'. | |
1276 | |
1277 +++ | |
1278 *** Info now hides node names in menus and cross references by default. | |
1279 If you prefer the old behavior, you can set the new user option | |
1280 `Info-hide-note-references' to nil. | |
1281 | |
1282 --- | |
1283 *** Images in Info pages are supported. | |
1284 Info pages show embedded images, in Emacs frames with image support. | |
1285 Info documentation that includes images, processed with makeinfo | |
1286 version 4.7 or newer, compiles to Info pages with embedded images. | |
1287 | |
1288 +++ | |
1289 *** The default value for `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' is now nil. | |
1290 | |
1291 --- | |
1292 *** Info-index offers completion. | |
1293 | |
1294 --- | |
1295 ** Lisp mode now uses font-lock-doc-face for the docstrings. | |
1296 | |
1297 +++ | |
1298 ** A prefix argument of C-M-q in Emacs Lisp mode pretty-printifies the | |
1299 list starting after point. | |
1300 | |
1301 ** New features in evaluation commands | |
1302 | |
1303 +++ | |
1304 *** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) called on defface reinitializes | |
1305 the face to the value specified in the defface expression. | |
1306 | |
1307 +++ | |
1308 *** Typing C-x C-e twice prints the value of the integer result | |
1309 in additional formats (octal, hexadecimal, character) specified | |
1310 by the new function `eval-expression-print-format'. The same | |
1311 function also defines the result format for `eval-expression' (M-:), | |
1312 `eval-print-last-sexp' (C-j) and some edebug evaluation functions. | |
1313 | |
1314 +++ | |
1315 ** CC Mode changes. | |
1316 | |
1317 *** Font lock support. | |
1318 CC Mode now provides font lock support for all its languages. This | |
1319 supersedes the font lock patterns that have been in the core font lock | |
1320 package for C, C++, Java and Objective-C. Like indentation, font | |
1321 locking is done in a uniform way across all languages (except the new | |
1322 AWK mode - see below). That means that the new font locking will be | |
1323 different from the old patterns in various details for most languages. | |
1324 | |
1325 The main goal of the font locking in CC Mode is accuracy, to provide a | |
1326 dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like | |
1327 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others like | |
1328 declarations and types can be very tricky. CC Mode can go to great | |
1329 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when | |
1330 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly | |
1331 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can | |
1332 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the | |
1333 variable font-lock-maximum-decoration. | |
1334 | |
1335 Note that the most demanding font lock level has been tuned with lazy | |
1336 fontification in mind, i.e. there should be a support mode that waits | |
1337 with the fontification until the text is actually shown | |
1338 (e.g. Just-in-time Lock mode, which is the default, or Lazy Lock | |
1339 mode). Fontifying a file with several thousand lines in one go can | |
1340 take the better part of a minute. | |
1341 | |
1342 **** The (c|c++|objc|java|idl|pike)-font-lock-extra-types variables | |
1343 are now used by CC Mode to recognize identifiers that are certain to | |
1344 be types. (They are also used in cases that aren't related to font | |
1345 locking.) At the maximum decoration level, types are often recognized | |
1346 properly anyway, so these variables should be fairly restrictive and | |
1347 not contain patterns for uncertain types. | |
1348 | |
1349 **** Support for documentation comments. | |
1350 There is a "plugin" system to fontify documentation comments like | |
1351 Javadoc and the markup within them. It's independent of the host | |
1352 language, so it's possible to e.g. turn on Javadoc font locking in C | |
1353 buffers. See the variable c-doc-comment-style for details. | |
1354 | |
1355 Currently two kinds of doc comment styles are recognized: Suns Javadoc | |
1356 and Autodoc which is used in Pike. This is by no means a complete | |
1357 list of the most common tools; if your doc comment extractor of choice | |
1358 is missing then please drop a note to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org. | |
1359 | |
1360 **** Better handling of C++ templates. | |
1361 As a side effect of the more accurate font locking, C++ templates are | |
1362 now handled much better. The angle brackets that delimit them are | |
1363 given parenthesis syntax so that they can be navigated like other | |
1364 parens. | |
1365 | |
1366 This also improves indentation of templates, although there still is | |
1367 work to be done in that area. E.g. it's required that multiline | |
1368 template clauses are written in full and then refontified to be | |
1369 recognized, and the indentation of nested templates is a bit odd and | |
1370 not as configurable as it ought to be. | |
1371 | |
1372 **** Improved handling of Objective-C and CORBA IDL. | |
1373 Especially the support for Objective-C and IDL has gotten an overhaul. | |
1374 The special "@" declarations in Objective-C are handled correctly. | |
1375 All the keywords used in CORBA IDL, PSDL, and CIDL are recognized and | |
1376 handled correctly, also wrt indentation. | |
1377 | |
1378 *** Support for the AWK language. | |
1379 Support for the AWK language has been introduced. The implementation is | |
1380 based around GNU AWK version 3.1, but it should work pretty well with | |
1381 any AWK. As yet, not all features of CC Mode have been adapted for AWK. | |
1382 Here is a summary: | |
1383 | |
1384 **** Indentation Engine | |
1385 The CC Mode indentation engine fully supports AWK mode. | |
1386 | |
1387 AWK mode handles code formatted in the conventional AWK fashion: `{'s | |
1388 which start actions, user-defined functions, or compound statements are | |
1389 placed on the same line as the associated construct; the matching `}'s | |
1390 are normally placed under the start of the respective pattern, function | |
1391 definition, or structured statement. | |
1392 | |
1393 The predefined indentation functions haven't yet been adapted for AWK | |
1394 mode, though some of them may work serendipitously. There shouldn't be | |
1395 any problems writing custom indentation functions for AWK mode. | |
1396 | |
1397 The command C-c C-q (c-indent-defun) hasn't yet been adapted for AWK, | |
1398 though in practice it works properly nearly all the time. Should it | |
1399 fail, explicitly set the region around the function (using C-u C-SPC: | |
1400 C-M-h probably won't work either) then do C-M-\ (indent-region). | |
1401 | |
1402 **** Font Locking | |
1403 There is a single level of font locking in AWK mode, rather than the | |
1404 three distinct levels the other modes have. There are several | |
1405 idiosyncrasies in AWK mode's font-locking due to the peculiarities of | |
1406 the AWK language itself. | |
1407 | |
1408 **** Comment Commands | |
1409 M-; (indent-for-comment) works fine. None of the other CC Mode | |
1410 comment formatting commands have yet been adapted for AWK mode. | |
1411 | |
1412 **** Movement Commands | |
1413 Most of the movement commands work in AWK mode. The most important | |
1414 exceptions are M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) and M-e | |
1415 (c-end-of-statement) which haven't yet been adapted. | |
1416 | |
1417 The notion of "defun" has been augmented to include AWK pattern-action | |
1418 pairs. C-M-a (c-awk-beginning-of-defun) and C-M-e (c-awk-end-of-defun) | |
1419 recognise these pattern-action pairs, as well as user defined | |
1420 functions. | |
1421 | |
1422 **** Auto-newline Insertion and Clean-ups | |
1423 Auto-newline insertion hasn't yet been adapted for AWK. Some of | |
1424 the clean-ups can actually convert good AWK code into syntactically | |
1425 invalid code. These features are best disabled in AWK buffers. | |
1426 | |
1427 *** New syntactic symbols in IDL mode. | |
1428 The top level constructs "module" and "composition" (from CIDL) are | |
1429 now handled like "namespace" in C++: They are given syntactic symbols | |
1430 module-open, module-close, inmodule, composition-open, | |
1431 composition-close, and incomposition. | |
1432 | |
1433 *** New functions to do hungry delete without enabling hungry delete mode. | |
1434 The functions c-hungry-backspace and c-hungry-delete-forward can be | |
1435 bound to keys to get this feature without toggling a mode. | |
1436 Contributed by Kevin Ryde. | |
1437 | |
1438 *** Better control over require-final-newline. The variable that | |
1439 controls how to handle a final newline when the buffer is saved, | |
1440 require-final-newline, is now customizable on a per-mode basis through | |
1441 c-require-final-newline. That is a list of modes, and only those | |
1442 modes set require-final-newline. By default that's C, C++ and | |
1443 Objective-C. | |
1444 | |
1445 The specified modes set require-final-newline based on | |
1446 mode-require-final-newline, as usual. | |
1447 | |
1448 *** Format change for syntactic context elements. | |
1449 The elements in the syntactic context returned by c-guess-basic-syntax | |
1450 and stored in c-syntactic-context has been changed somewhat to allow | |
1451 attaching more information. They are now lists instead of single cons | |
1452 cells. E.g. a line that previously had the syntactic analysis | |
1453 | |
1454 ((inclass . 11) (topmost-intro . 13)) | |
1455 | |
1456 is now analysed as | |
1457 | |
1458 ((inclass 11) (topmost-intro 13)) | |
1459 | |
1460 In some cases there are more than one position given for a syntactic | |
1461 symbol. | |
1462 | |
1463 This change might affect code that call c-guess-basic-syntax directly, | |
1464 and custom lineup functions if they use c-syntactic-context. However, | |
1465 the argument given to lineup functions is still a single cons cell | |
1466 with nil or an integer in the cdr. | |
1467 | |
1468 *** API changes for derived modes. | |
1469 There have been extensive changes "under the hood" which can affect | |
1470 derived mode writers. Some of these changes are likely to cause | |
1471 incompatibilities with existing derived modes, but on the other hand | |
1472 care has now been taken to make it possible to extend and modify CC | |
1473 Mode with less risk of such problems in the future. | |
1474 | |
1475 **** New language variable system. | |
1476 See the comment blurb near the top of cc-langs.el. | |
1477 | |
1478 **** New initialization functions. | |
1479 The initialization procedure has been split up into more functions to | |
1480 give better control: c-basic-common-init, c-font-lock-init, and | |
1481 c-init-language-vars. | |
1482 | |
1483 *** Changes in analysis of nested syntactic constructs. | |
1484 The syntactic analysis engine has better handling of cases where | |
1485 several syntactic constructs appear nested on the same line. They are | |
1486 now handled as if each construct started on a line of its own. | |
1487 | |
1488 This means that CC Mode now indents some cases differently, and | |
1489 although it's more consistent there might be cases where the old way | |
1490 gave results that's more to one's liking. So if you find a situation | |
1491 where you think that the indentation has become worse, please report | |
1492 it to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org. | |
1493 | |
1494 **** New syntactic symbol substatement-label. | |
1495 This symbol is used when a label is inserted between a statement and | |
1496 its substatement. E.g: | |
1497 | |
1498 if (x) | |
1499 x_is_true: | |
1500 do_stuff(); | |
1501 | |
1502 *** Better handling of multiline macros. | |
1503 | |
1504 **** Syntactic indentation inside macros. | |
1505 The contents of multiline #define's are now analyzed and indented | |
1506 syntactically just like other code. This can be disabled by the new | |
1507 variable c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros. A new syntactic symbol | |
1508 cpp-define-intro has been added to control the initial indentation | |
1509 inside #define's. | |
1510 | |
1511 **** New lineup function c-lineup-cpp-define. | |
1512 Now used by default to line up macro continuation lines. The behavior | |
1513 of this function closely mimics the indentation one gets if the macro | |
1514 is indented while the line continuation backslashes are temporarily | |
1515 removed. If syntactic indentation in macros is turned off, it works | |
1516 much line c-lineup-dont-change, which was used earlier, but handles | |
1517 empty lines within the macro better. | |
1518 | |
1519 **** Automatically inserted newlines continues the macro if used within one. | |
1520 This applies to the newlines inserted by the auto-newline mode, and to | |
1521 c-context-line-break and c-context-open-line. | |
1522 | |
1523 **** Better alignment of line continuation backslashes. | |
1524 c-backslash-region tries to adapt to surrounding backslashes. New | |
1525 variable c-backslash-max-column which put a limit on how far out | |
1526 backslashes can be moved. | |
1527 | |
1528 **** Automatic alignment of line continuation backslashes. | |
1529 This is controlled by the new variable c-auto-align-backslashes. It | |
1530 affects c-context-line-break, c-context-open-line and newlines | |
1531 inserted in auto-newline mode. | |
1532 | |
1533 **** Line indentation works better inside macros. | |
1534 Regardless whether syntactic indentation and syntactic indentation | |
1535 inside macros are enabled or not, line indentation now ignores the | |
1536 line continuation backslashes. This is most noticeable when syntactic | |
1537 indentation is turned off and there are empty lines (save for the | |
1538 backslash) in the macro. | |
1539 | |
1540 *** indent-for-comment is more customizable. | |
1541 The behavior of M-; (indent-for-comment) is now configurable through | |
1542 the variable c-indent-comment-alist. The indentation behavior based | |
1543 on the preceding code on the line, e.g. to get two spaces after #else | |
1544 and #endif but indentation to comment-column in most other cases | |
1545 (something which was hardcoded earlier). | |
1546 | |
1547 *** New function c-context-open-line. | |
1548 It's the open-line equivalent of c-context-line-break. | |
1549 | |
1550 *** New lineup functions | |
1551 | |
1552 **** c-lineup-string-cont | |
1553 This lineup function lines up a continued string under the one it | |
1554 continues. E.g: | |
1555 | |
1556 result = prefix + "A message " | |
1557 "string."; <- c-lineup-string-cont | |
1558 | |
1559 **** c-lineup-cascaded-calls | |
1560 Lines up series of calls separated by "->" or ".". | |
1561 | |
1562 **** c-lineup-knr-region-comment | |
1563 Gives (what most people think is) better indentation of comments in | |
1564 the "K&R region" between the function header and its body. | |
1565 | |
1566 **** c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg | |
1567 Provides better indentation inside asm blocks. Contributed by Kevin | |
1568 Ryde. | |
1569 | |
1570 **** c-lineup-argcont | |
1571 Lines up continued function arguments after the preceding comma. | |
1572 Contributed by Kevin Ryde. | |
1573 | |
1574 *** Better caching of the syntactic context. | |
1575 CC Mode caches the positions of the opening parentheses (of any kind) | |
1576 of the lists surrounding the point. Those positions are used in many | |
1577 places as anchor points for various searches. The cache is now | |
1578 improved so that it can be reused to a large extent when the point is | |
1579 moved. The less it moves, the less needs to be recalculated. | |
1580 | |
1581 The effect is that CC Mode should be fast most of the time even when | |
1582 opening parens are hung (i.e. aren't in column zero). It's typically | |
1583 only the first time after the point is moved far down in a complex | |
1584 file that it'll take noticeable time to find out the syntactic | |
1585 context. | |
1586 | |
1587 *** Statements are recognized in a more robust way. | |
1588 Statements are recognized most of the time even when they occur in an | |
1589 "invalid" context, e.g. in a function argument. In practice that can | |
1590 happen when macros are involved. | |
1591 | |
1592 *** Improved the way c-indent-exp chooses the block to indent. | |
1593 It now indents the block for the closest sexp following the point | |
1594 whose closing paren ends on a different line. This means that the | |
1595 point doesn't have to be immediately before the block to indent. | |
1596 Also, only the block and the closing line is indented; the current | |
1597 line is left untouched. | |
1598 | |
1599 *** Added toggle for syntactic indentation. | |
1600 The function c-toggle-syntactic-indentation can be used to toggle | |
1601 syntactic indentation. | |
1602 | |
1603 --- | |
1604 ** Perl mode has a new variable `perl-indent-continued-arguments'. | |
1605 | |
1606 --- | |
1607 ** Fortran mode does more font-locking by default. Use level 3 | |
1608 highlighting for the old default. | |
1609 | |
1610 +++ | |
1611 ** Fortran mode has a new variable `fortran-directive-re'. | |
1612 Adapt this to match the format of any compiler directives you use. | |
1613 Lines that match are never indented, and are given distinctive font-locking. | |
1614 | |
1615 +++ | |
1616 ** F90 mode and Fortran mode have new navigation commands | |
1617 `f90-end-of-block', `f90-beginning-of-block', `f90-next-block', | |
1618 `f90-previous-block', `fortran-end-of-block', | |
1619 `fortran-beginning-of-block'. | |
1620 | |
1621 --- | |
1622 ** F90 mode and Fortran mode have support for hs-minor-mode (hideshow). | |
1623 It cannot deal with every code format, but ought to handle a sizeable | |
1624 majority. | |
1625 | |
1626 --- | |
1627 ** The new function `f90-backslash-not-special' can be used to change | |
1628 the syntax of backslashes in F90 buffers. | |
1629 | |
1630 --- | |
1631 ** Prolog mode has a new variable `prolog-font-lock-keywords' | |
1632 to support use of font-lock. | |
1633 | |
1634 --- | |
1635 ** Emacs now tries to set up buffer coding systems for HTML/XML files | |
1636 automatically. | |
1637 | |
1638 +++ | |
1639 ** SGML mode has indentation and supports XML syntax. | |
1640 The new variable `sgml-xml-mode' tells SGML mode to use XML syntax. | |
1641 When this option is enabled, SGML tags are inserted in XML style, | |
1642 i.e., there is always a closing tag. | |
1643 By default, its setting is inferred on a buffer-by-buffer basis | |
1644 from the file name or buffer contents. | |
1645 | |
1646 +++ | |
1647 ** `xml-mode' is now an alias for `sgml-mode', which has XML support. | |
1648 | |
1649 ** TeX modes: | |
1650 | |
1651 +++ | |
1652 *** C-c C-c prompts for a command to run, and tries to offer a good default. | |
1653 | |
1654 +++ | |
1655 *** The user option `tex-start-options-string' has been replaced | |
1656 by two new user options: `tex-start-options', which should hold | |
1657 command-line options to feed to TeX, and `tex-start-commands' which should hold | |
1658 TeX commands to use at startup. | |
1659 | |
1660 --- | |
1661 *** verbatim environments are now highlighted in courier by font-lock | |
1662 and super/sub-scripts are made into super/sub-scripts. | |
1663 | |
1664 +++ | |
1665 *** New major mode doctex-mode for *.dtx files. | |
1666 | |
1667 ** BibTeX mode: | |
1668 *** The new command bibtex-url browses a URL for the BibTeX entry at | |
1669 point (bound to C-c C-l and mouse-2, RET on clickable fields). | |
1670 | |
1671 *** The new command bibtex-entry-update (bound to C-c C-u) updates | |
1672 an existing BibTeX entry. | |
1673 | |
1674 *** New `bibtex-entry-format' option `required-fields', enabled by default. | |
1675 | |
1676 *** bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries can take values `plain', | |
1677 `crossref', and `entry-class' which control the sorting scheme used | |
1678 for BibTeX entries. `bibtex-sort-entry-class' controls the sorting | |
1679 scheme `entry-class'. TAB completion for reference keys and | |
1680 automatic detection of duplicates does not require anymore that | |
1681 bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil. | |
1682 | |
1683 *** If the new variable bibtex-parse-keys-fast is non-nil, | |
1684 use fast but simplified algorithm for parsing BibTeX keys. | |
1685 | |
1686 *** If the new variable bibtex-autoadd-commas is non-nil, | |
1687 automatically add missing commas at end of BibTeX fields. | |
1688 | |
1689 *** The new variable bibtex-autofill-types contains a list of entry | |
1690 types for which fields are filled automatically (if possible). | |
1691 | |
1692 *** The new command bibtex-complete completes word fragment before | |
1693 point according to context (bound to M-tab). | |
1694 | |
1695 *** The new commands bibtex-find-entry and bibtex-find-crossref | |
1696 locate entries and crossref'd entries (bound to C-c C-s and C-c C-x). | |
1697 Crossref fields are clickable (bound to mouse-2, RET). | |
1698 | |
1699 *** In BibTeX mode the command fill-paragraph (bound to M-q) fills | |
1700 individual fields of a BibTeX entry. | |
1701 | |
1702 *** The new variables bibtex-files and bibtex-file-path define a set | |
1703 of BibTeX files that are searched for entry keys. | |
1704 | |
1705 *** The new command bibtex-validate-globally checks for duplicate keys | |
1706 in multiple BibTeX files. | |
1707 | |
1708 *** The new command bibtex-copy-summary-as-kill pushes summary | |
1709 of BibTeX entry to kill ring (bound to C-c C-t). | |
1710 | |
1711 +++ | |
1712 ** In Enriched mode, `set-left-margin' and `set-right-margin' are now | |
1713 by default bound to `C-c [' and `C-c ]' instead of the former `C-c C-l' | |
1714 and `C-c C-r'. | |
1715 | |
1716 +++ | |
1717 ** In GUD mode, when talking to GDB, C-x C-a C-j "jumps" the program | |
1718 counter to the specified source line (the one where point is). | |
1719 | |
1720 --- | |
1721 ** GUD mode has its own tool bar for controlling execution of the inferior | |
1722 and other common debugger commands. | |
1723 | |
1724 --- | |
1725 ** GUD mode improvements for jdb: | |
1726 | |
1727 *** Search for source files using jdb classpath and class | |
1728 information. Fast startup since there is no need to scan all | |
1729 source files up front. There is also no need to create and maintain | |
1730 lists of source directories to scan. Look at `gud-jdb-use-classpath' | |
1731 and `gud-jdb-classpath' customization variables documentation. | |
1732 | |
1733 *** Supports the standard breakpoint (gud-break, gud-clear) | |
1734 set/clear operations from java source files under the classpath, stack | |
1735 traversal (gud-up, gud-down), and run until current stack finish | |
1736 (gud-finish). | |
1737 | |
1738 *** Supports new jdb (Java 1.2 and later) in addition to oldjdb | |
1739 (Java 1.1 jdb). | |
1740 | |
1741 *** The previous method of searching for source files has been | |
1742 preserved in case someone still wants/needs to use it. | |
1743 Set gud-jdb-use-classpath to nil. | |
1744 | |
1745 Added Customization Variables | |
1746 | |
1747 *** gud-jdb-command-name. What command line to use to invoke jdb. | |
1748 | |
1749 *** gud-jdb-use-classpath. Allows selection of java source file searching | |
1750 method: set to t for new method, nil to scan gud-jdb-directories for | |
1751 java sources (previous method). | |
1752 | |
1753 *** gud-jdb-directories. List of directories to scan and search for java | |
1754 classes using the original gud-jdb method (if gud-jdb-use-classpath | |
1755 is nil). | |
1756 | |
1757 Minor Improvements | |
1758 | |
1759 *** The STARTTLS elisp wrapper (starttls.el) can now use GNUTLS | |
1760 instead of the OpenSSL based "starttls" tool. For backwards | |
1761 compatibility, it prefers "starttls", but you can toggle | |
1762 `starttls-use-gnutls' to switch to GNUTLS (or simply remove the | |
1763 "starttls" tool). | |
1764 | |
1765 *** Do not allow debugger output history variable to grow without bounds. | |
423 | 1766 |
424 +++ | 1767 +++ |
425 ** You can now use Auto Revert mode to `tail' a file. | 1768 ** You can now use Auto Revert mode to `tail' a file. |
426 If point is at the end of a file buffer before reverting, Auto Revert | 1769 If point is at the end of a file buffer before reverting, Auto Revert |
427 mode keeps it at the end after reverting. Similarly if point is | 1770 mode keeps it at the end after reverting. Similarly if point is |
452 Revert mode reliably updates version control info (such as the version | 1795 Revert mode reliably updates version control info (such as the version |
453 control number in the mode line), in all version controlled buffers in | 1796 control number in the mode line), in all version controlled buffers in |
454 which it is active. If the option is nil, the default, then this info | 1797 which it is active. If the option is nil, the default, then this info |
455 only gets updated whenever the buffer gets reverted. | 1798 only gets updated whenever the buffer gets reverted. |
456 | 1799 |
457 +++ | 1800 --- |
458 ** New command `Buffer-menu-toggle-files-only' toggles display of file | 1801 ** recentf changes. |
459 buffers only in the Buffer Menu. It is bound to `T' in Buffer Menu | 1802 |
460 mode. | 1803 The recent file list is now automatically cleanup when recentf mode is |
461 | 1804 enabled. The new option `recentf-auto-cleanup' controls when to do |
462 --- | 1805 automatic cleanup. |
463 ** M-x compile has become more robust and reliable | 1806 |
464 | 1807 The `recentf-keep' option replaces `recentf-keep-non-readable-files-p' |
465 Quite a few more kinds of messages are recognized. Messages that are | 1808 and provides a more general mechanism to customize which file names to |
466 recognized as warnings or informational come in orange or green, instead of | 1809 keep in the recent list. |
467 red. Informational messages are by default skipped with `next-error' | 1810 |
468 (controlled by `compilation-skip-threshold'). | 1811 With the more advanced option: `recentf-filename-handler', you can |
469 | 1812 specify a function that transforms filenames handled by recentf. For |
470 Location data is collected on the fly as the *compilation* buffer changes. | 1813 example, if set to `file-truename', the same file will not be in the |
471 This means you could modify messages to make them point to different files. | 1814 recent list with different symbolic links. |
472 This also means you can not go to locations of messages you may have deleted. | 1815 |
473 | 1816 To follow naming convention, `recentf-menu-append-commands-flag' |
474 The variable `compilation-error-regexp-alist' has now become customizable. If | 1817 replaces the misnamed option `recentf-menu-append-commands-p'. The |
475 you had added your own regexps to this, you'll probably need to include a | 1818 old name remains available as alias, but has been marked obsolete. |
476 leading `^', otherwise they'll match anywhere on a line. There is now also a | |
477 `compilation-mode-font-lock-keywords' and it nicely handles all the checks | |
478 that configure outputs and -o options so you see at a glance where you are. | |
479 | |
480 The new file etc/compilation.txt gives examples of each type of message. | |
481 | |
482 ** Compilation mode enhancements: | |
483 | |
484 +++ | |
485 *** New user option `compilation-environment'. | |
486 This option allows you to specify environment variables for inferior | |
487 compilation processes without affecting the environment that all | |
488 subprocesses inherit. | |
489 | |
490 +++ | |
491 ** Grep has been decoupled from compilation mode setup. | |
492 | |
493 --- | |
494 *** There's a new separate package grep.el. | |
495 | |
496 --- | |
497 *** M-x grep has been adapted to new compile | |
498 | |
499 Hits are fontified in green, and hits in binary files in orange. Grep buffers | |
500 can be saved and automatically revisited with the new Grep mode. | |
501 | |
502 --- | |
503 *** Grep commands now have their own submenu and customization group. | |
504 | |
505 +++ | |
506 *** `grep-find' is now also available under the name `find-grep' where | |
507 people knowing `find-grep-dired' would probably expect it. | |
508 | |
509 --- | |
510 *** The new variables `grep-window-height', `grep-auto-highlight', and | |
511 `grep-scroll-output' can be used to override the corresponding | |
512 compilation mode settings for grep commands. | |
513 | |
514 +++ | |
515 *** New option `grep-highlight-matches' highlightes matches in *grep* | |
516 buffer. It uses a special feature of some grep programs which accept | |
517 --color option to output markers around matches. When going to the next | |
518 match with `next-error' the exact match is highlighted in the source | |
519 buffer. Otherwise, if `grep-highlight-matches' is nil, the whole | |
520 source line is highlighted. | |
521 | |
522 +++ | |
523 *** New key bindings in grep output window: | |
524 SPC and DEL scrolls window up and down. C-n and C-p moves to next and | |
525 previous match in the grep window. RET jumps to the source line of | |
526 the current match. `n' and `p' shows next and previous match in | |
527 other window, but does not switch buffer. `{' and `}' jumps to the | |
528 previous or next file in the grep output. TAB also jumps to the next | |
529 file. | |
530 | |
531 +++ | |
532 ** New options `next-error-highlight' and `next-error-highlight-no-select' | |
533 specify the method of highlighting of the corresponding source line | |
534 in new face `next-error'. | |
535 | |
536 +++ | |
537 ** A new minor mode `next-error-follow-minor-mode' can be used in | |
538 compilation-mode, grep-mode, occur-mode, and diff-mode (i.e. all the | |
539 modes that can use `next-error'). In this mode, cursor motion in the | |
540 buffer causes automatic display in another window of the corresponding | |
541 matches, compilation errors, etc. This minor mode can be toggled with | |
542 C-c C-f. | |
543 | |
544 +++ | |
545 ** M-x diff uses diff-mode instead of compilation-mode. | |
546 | |
547 +++ | |
548 ** M-x compare-windows now can automatically skip non-matching text to | |
549 resync points in both windows. | |
550 | |
551 --- | |
552 ** New command `strokes-global-set-stroke-string'. | |
553 This is like `strokes-global-set-stroke', but it allows you to bind | |
554 the stroke directly to a string to insert. This is convenient for | |
555 using strokes as an input method. | |
556 | |
557 ** Gnus package | |
558 | |
559 --- | |
560 *** Gnus now includes Sieve and PGG | |
561 Sieve is a library for managing Sieve scripts. PGG is a library to handle | |
562 PGP/MIME. | |
563 | |
564 --- | |
565 *** There are many news features, bug fixes and improvements. | |
566 See the file GNUS-NEWS or the node "Oort Gnus" in the Gnus manual for details. | |
567 | 1819 |
568 +++ | 1820 +++ |
569 ** Desktop package | 1821 ** Desktop package |
570 | 1822 |
571 +++ | 1823 +++ |
620 Customize the new option `save-place-forget-unreadable-files' to nil | 1872 Customize the new option `save-place-forget-unreadable-files' to nil |
621 to get the old behavior. The new options `save-place-save-skipped' | 1873 to get the old behavior. The new options `save-place-save-skipped' |
622 and `save-place-skip-check-regexp' allow further fine-tuning of this | 1874 and `save-place-skip-check-regexp' allow further fine-tuning of this |
623 feature. | 1875 feature. |
624 | 1876 |
625 +++ | 1877 ** EDiff changes. |
626 ** You can have several Emacs servers on the same machine. | 1878 |
627 | 1879 +++ |
628 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "foo")' -f server-start & | 1880 *** When comparing directories. |
629 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "bar")' -f server-start & | 1881 Typing D brings up a buffer that lists the differences between the contents of |
630 % emacsclient -s foo file1 | 1882 directories. Now it is possible to use this buffer to copy the missing files |
631 % emacsclient -s bar file2 | 1883 from one directory to another. |
632 | 1884 |
633 +++ | 1885 +++ |
634 ** On window systems, lines which are exactly as wide as the window | 1886 *** When comparing files or buffers. |
635 (not counting the final newline character) are no longer broken into | 1887 Typing the = key now offers to perform the word-by-word comparison of the |
636 two lines on the display (with just the newline on the second line). | 1888 currently highlighted regions in an inferior Ediff session. If you answer 'n' |
637 Instead, the newline now "overflows" into the right fringe, and the | 1889 then it reverts to the old behavior and asks the user to select regions for |
638 cursor will be displayed in the fringe when positioned on that newline. | 1890 comparison. |
639 | 1891 |
640 The new user option 'overflow-newline-into-fringe' may be set to nil to | 1892 *** The new command `ediff-backup' compares a file with its most recent |
641 revert to the old behavior of continuing such lines. | 1893 backup using `ediff'. If you specify the name of a backup file, |
642 | 1894 `ediff-backup' compares it with the file of which it is a backup. |
643 +++ | 1895 |
644 ** The buffer boundaries (i.e. first and last line in the buffer) may | 1896 +++ |
645 now be marked with angle bitmaps in the fringes. In addition, up and | 1897 ** Etags changes. |
646 down arrow bitmaps may be shown at the top and bottom of the left or | 1898 |
647 right fringe if the window can be scrolled in either direction. | 1899 *** New regular expressions features |
648 | 1900 |
649 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | 1901 **** New syntax for regular expressions, multi-line regular expressions. |
650 `indicate-buffer-boundaries' to a non-nil value. The default value of | 1902 The syntax --ignore-case-regexp=/regex/ is now undocumented and retained |
651 this variable is found in `default-indicate-buffer-boundaries'. | 1903 only for backward compatibility. The new equivalent syntax is |
652 | 1904 --regex=/regex/i. More generally, it is --regex=/TAGREGEX/TAGNAME/MODS, |
653 If value is `left' or `right', both angle and arrow bitmaps are | 1905 where `/TAGNAME' is optional, as usual, and MODS is a string of 0 or |
654 displayed in the left or right fringe, resp. | 1906 more characters among `i' (ignore case), `m' (multi-line) and `s' |
655 | 1907 (single-line). The `m' and `s' modifiers behave as in Perl regular |
656 Value may also be an alist which specifies the presense and position | 1908 expressions: `m' allows regexps to match more than one line, while `s' |
657 of each bitmap individually. | 1909 (which implies `m') means that `.' matches newlines. The ability to |
658 | 1910 span newlines allows writing of much more powerful regular expressions |
659 For example, ((top . left) (t . right)) places the top angle bitmap | 1911 and rapid prototyping for tagging new languages. |
660 in left fringe, the bottom angle bitmap in right fringe, and both | 1912 |
661 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show just the angle bitmaps in the | 1913 **** Regular expressions can use char escape sequences as in Gcc. |
662 left fringe, but no arrow bitmaps, use ((top . left) (bottom . left)). | 1914 The escaped character sequence \a, \b, \d, \e, \f, \n, \r, \t, \v, |
663 | 1915 respectively, stand for the ASCII characters BEL, BS, DEL, ESC, FF, NL, |
664 +++ | 1916 CR, TAB, VT, |
665 ** New command `display-local-help' displays any local help at point | 1917 |
666 in the echo area. It is bound to `C-h .'. It normally displays the | 1918 **** Regular expressions can be bound to a given language. |
667 same string that would be displayed on mouse-over using the | 1919 The syntax --regex={LANGUAGE}REGEX means that REGEX is used to make tags |
668 `help-echo' property, but, in certain cases, it can display a more | 1920 only for files of language LANGUAGE, and ignored otherwise. This is |
669 keyboard oriented alternative. | 1921 particularly useful when storing regexps in a file. |
670 | 1922 |
671 +++ | 1923 **** Regular expressions can be read from a file. |
672 ** New user option `help-at-pt-display-when-idle' allows to | 1924 The --regex=@regexfile option means read the regexps from a file, one |
673 automatically show the help provided by `display-local-help' on | 1925 per line. Lines beginning with space or tab are ignored. |
674 point-over, after suitable idle time. The amount of idle time is | 1926 |
675 determined by the user option `help-at-pt-timer-delay' and defaults | 1927 *** New language parsing features |
676 to one second. This feature is turned off by default. | 1928 |
677 | 1929 **** The `::' qualifier triggers C++ parsing in C file. |
678 --- | 1930 Previously, only the `template' and `class' keywords had this effect. |
679 ** New commands `scan-buf-next-region' and `scan-buf-previous-region' | 1931 |
680 move to the start of the next (previous, respectively) region with | 1932 **** The gnucc __attribute__ keyword is now recognised and ignored. |
681 non-nil help-echo property and display any help found there in the | 1933 |
682 echo area, using `display-local-help'. | 1934 **** New language HTML. |
683 | 1935 Title and h1, h2, h3 are tagged. Also, tags are generated when name= is |
684 +++ | 1936 used inside an anchor and whenever id= is used. |
685 ** Help mode now only makes hyperlinks for faces when the face name is | 1937 |
686 preceded or followed by the word `face'. It no longer makes | 1938 **** In Makefiles, constants are tagged. |
687 hyperlinks for variables without variable documentation, unless | 1939 If you want the old behavior instead, thus avoiding to increase the |
688 preceded by one of the words `variable' or `option'. It now makes | 1940 size of the tags file, use the --no-globals option. |
689 hyperlinks to Info anchors (or nodes) if the anchor (or node) name is | 1941 |
690 enclosed in single quotes and preceded by `info anchor' or `Info | 1942 **** New language Lua. |
691 anchor' (in addition to earlier `info node' and `Info node'). | 1943 All functions are tagged. |
692 | 1944 |
693 +++ | 1945 **** In Perl, packages are tags. |
694 ** The max size of buffers and integers has been doubled. | 1946 Subroutine tags are named from their package. You can jump to sub tags |
695 On 32bit machines, it is now 256M (i.e. 268435455). | 1947 as you did before, by the sub name, or additionally by looking for |
696 | 1948 package::sub. |
697 +++ | 1949 |
698 ** The -f option, used from the command line to call a function, | 1950 **** In Prolog, etags creates tags for rules in addition to predicates. |
699 now reads arguments for the function interactively if it is | 1951 |
700 an interactively callable function. | 1952 **** New language PHP. |
1953 Tags are functions, classes and defines. | |
1954 If the --members option is specified to etags, tags are variables also. | |
1955 | |
1956 **** New default keywords for TeX. | |
1957 The new keywords are def, newcommand, renewcommand, newenvironment and | |
1958 renewenvironment. | |
1959 | |
1960 *** Honour #line directives. | |
1961 When Etags parses an input file that contains C preprocessor's #line | |
1962 directives, it creates tags using the file name and line number | |
1963 specified in those directives. This is useful when dealing with code | |
1964 created from Cweb source files. When Etags tags the generated file, it | |
1965 writes tags pointing to the source file. | |
1966 | |
1967 *** New option --parse-stdin=FILE. | |
1968 This option is mostly useful when calling etags from programs. It can | |
1969 be used (only once) in place of a file name on the command line. Etags | |
1970 reads from standard input and marks the produced tags as belonging to | |
1971 the file FILE. | |
1972 | |
1973 ** VC Changes | |
1974 | |
1975 +++ | |
1976 *** The key C-x C-q no longer checks files in or out, it only changes | |
1977 the read-only state of the buffer (toggle-read-only). We made this | |
1978 change because we held a poll and found that many users were unhappy | |
1979 with the previous behavior. If you do prefer this behavior, you | |
1980 can bind `vc-toggle-read-only' to C-x C-q in your .emacs: | |
1981 | |
1982 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-q" 'vc-toggle-read-only) | |
1983 | |
1984 The function `vc-toggle-read-only' will continue to exist. | |
1985 | |
1986 +++ | |
1987 *** There is a new user option `vc-cvs-global-switches' that allows | |
1988 you to specify switches that are passed to any CVS command invoked | |
1989 by VC. These switches are used as "global options" for CVS, which | |
1990 means they are inserted before the command name. For example, this | |
1991 allows you to specify a compression level using the "-z#" option for | |
1992 CVS. | |
1993 | |
1994 +++ | |
1995 *** New backends for Subversion and Meta-CVS. | |
1996 | |
1997 +++ | |
1998 ** vc-annotate-mode enhancements | |
1999 | |
2000 In vc-annotate mode, you can now use the following key bindings for | |
2001 enhanced functionality to browse the annotations of past revisions, or | |
2002 to view diffs or log entries directly from vc-annotate-mode: | |
2003 | |
2004 P: annotates the previous revision | |
2005 N: annotates the next revision | |
2006 J: annotates the revision at line | |
2007 A: annotates the revision previous to line | |
2008 D: shows the diff of the revision at line with its previous revision | |
2009 L: shows the log of the revision at line | |
2010 W: annotates the workfile (most up to date) version | |
2011 | |
2012 +++ | |
2013 ** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d y' command to view the diffs | |
2014 between the local version of the file and yesterday's head revision | |
2015 in the repository. | |
2016 | |
2017 +++ | |
2018 ** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d r' command to view the changes | |
2019 anyone has committed to the repository since you last executed | |
2020 "checkout", "update" or "commit". That means using cvs diff options | |
2021 -rBASE -rHEAD. | |
2022 | |
2023 +++ | |
2024 ** There is a new user option `mail-default-directory' that allows you | |
2025 to specify the value of `default-directory' for mail buffers. This | |
2026 directory is used for auto-save files of mail buffers. It defaults to | |
2027 "~/". | |
2028 | |
2029 +++ | |
2030 ** Emacs can now indicate in the mode-line the presence of new e-mail | |
2031 in a directory or in a file. See the documentation of the user option | |
2032 `display-time-mail-directory'. | |
2033 | |
2034 --- | |
2035 ** PO translation files are decoded according to their MIME headers | |
2036 when Emacs visits them. | |
2037 | |
2038 ** Gnus package | |
2039 | |
2040 --- | |
2041 *** Gnus now includes Sieve and PGG | |
2042 Sieve is a library for managing Sieve scripts. PGG is a library to handle | |
2043 PGP/MIME. | |
2044 | |
2045 --- | |
2046 *** There are many news features, bug fixes and improvements. | |
2047 See the file GNUS-NEWS or the node "Oort Gnus" in the Gnus manual for details. | |
2048 | |
2049 --- | |
2050 ** Rmail now displays 5-digit message ids in its summary buffer. | |
2051 | |
2052 +++ | |
2053 ** Support for `movemail' from GNU mailutils was added to Rmail. | |
2054 This version of `movemail' allows to read mail from a wide range of | |
2055 mailbox formats, including remote POP3 and IMAP4 mailboxes with or | |
2056 without TLS encryption. If GNU mailutils is installed on the system | |
2057 and its version of `movemail' can be found in exec-path, it will be | |
2058 used instead of the native one. | |
2059 | |
2060 --- | |
2061 ** MH-E changes. | |
2062 | |
2063 Upgraded to MH-E version 7.82. There have been major changes since | |
2064 version 5.0.2; see MH-E-NEWS for details. | |
2065 | |
2066 +++ | |
2067 ** There is a new calendar package, icalendar.el, that can be used to | |
2068 convert Emacs diary entries to/from the iCalendar format. | |
2069 | |
2070 +++ | |
2071 ** Diary sexp entries can have custom marking in the calendar. | |
2072 Diary sexp functions which only apply to certain days (such as | |
2073 `diary-block' or `diary-cyclic') now take an optional parameter MARK, | |
2074 which is the name of a face or a single-character string indicating | |
2075 how to highlight the day in the calendar display. Specifying a | |
2076 single-character string as @var{mark} places the character next to the | |
2077 day in the calendar. Specifying a face highlights the day with that | |
2078 face. This lets you have different colors or markings for vacations, | |
2079 appointments, paydays or anything else using a sexp. | |
2080 | |
2081 +++ | |
2082 ** The new function `calendar-goto-day-of-year' (g D) prompts for a | |
2083 year and day number, and moves to that date. Negative day numbers | |
2084 count backward from the end of the year. | |
2085 | |
2086 +++ | |
2087 ** The new Calendar function `calendar-goto-iso-week' (g w) | |
2088 prompts for a year and a week number, and moves to the first | |
2089 day of that ISO week. | |
2090 | |
2091 --- | |
2092 ** The new variable `calendar-minimum-window-height' affects the | |
2093 window generated by the function `generate-calendar-window'. | |
2094 | |
2095 --- | |
2096 ** The functions `holiday-easter-etc' and `holiday-advent' now take | |
2097 optional arguments, in order to only report on the specified holiday | |
2098 rather than all. This makes customization of variables such as | |
2099 `christian-holidays' simpler. | |
2100 | |
2101 --- | |
2102 ** The function `simple-diary-display' now by default sets a header line. | |
2103 This can be controlled through the variables `diary-header-line-flag' | |
2104 and `diary-header-line-format'. | |
2105 | |
2106 +++ | |
2107 ** The procedure for activating appointment reminders has changed: use | |
2108 the new function `appt-activate'. The new variable | |
2109 `appt-display-format' controls how reminders are displayed, replacing | |
2110 appt-issue-message, appt-visible, and appt-msg-window. | |
2111 | |
2112 +++ | |
2113 ** The new functions `diary-from-outlook', `diary-from-outlook-gnus', | |
2114 and `diary-from-outlook-rmail' can be used to import diary entries | |
2115 from Outlook-format appointments in mail messages. The variable | |
2116 `diary-outlook-formats' can be customized to recognize additional | |
2117 formats. | |
2118 | |
2119 +++ | |
2120 ** Emacs now supports drag and drop for X. Dropping a file on a window | |
2121 opens it, dropping text inserts the text. Dropping a file on a dired | |
2122 buffer copies or moves the file to that directory. | |
2123 | |
2124 +++ | |
2125 ** Under X11, it is possible to swap Alt and Meta (and Super and Hyper). | |
2126 The new variables `x-alt-keysym', `x-hyper-keysym', `x-meta-keysym', | |
2127 and `x-super-keysym' can be used to choose which keysyms Emacs should | |
2128 use for the modifiers. For example, the following two lines swap | |
2129 Meta and Alt: | |
2130 (setq x-alt-keysym 'meta) | |
2131 (setq x-meta-keysym 'alt) | |
2132 | |
2133 +++ | |
2134 ** The X resource useXIM can be used to turn off use of XIM, which may | |
2135 speed up Emacs with slow networking to the X server. | |
2136 | |
2137 If the configure option `--without-xim' was used to turn off use of | |
2138 XIM by default, the X resource useXIM can be used to turn it on. | |
2139 | |
2140 --- | |
2141 ** The new variable `x-select-request-type' controls how Emacs | |
2142 requests X selection. The default value is nil, which means that | |
2143 Emacs requests X selection with types COMPOUND_TEXT and UTF8_STRING, | |
2144 and use the more appropriately result. | |
2145 | |
2146 --- | |
2147 ** The scrollbar under LessTif or Motif has a smoother drag-scrolling. | |
2148 On the other hand, the size of the thumb does not represent the actual | |
2149 amount of text shown any more (only a crude approximation of it). | |
2150 | |
2151 --- | |
2152 ** The pop up menus for Lucid now stay up if you do a fast click and can | |
2153 be navigated with the arrow keys (like Gtk+, Mac and W32). | |
2154 | |
2155 +++ | |
2156 ** The Lucid menus can display multilingual text in your locale. You have | |
2157 to explicitly specify a fontSet resource for this to work, for example | |
2158 `-xrm "Emacs*fontSet: -*-helvetica-medium-r-*--*-120-*-*-*-*-*-*,*"'. | |
2159 | |
2160 --- | |
2161 ** Dialogs for Lucid/Athena and Lesstif/Motif now pops down when pressing | |
2162 ESC, like they do for Gtk+, Mac and W32. | |
2163 | |
2164 --- | |
2165 ** Dialogs and menus pop down if you type C-g. | |
2166 | |
2167 --- | |
2168 ** The menu item "Open File..." has been split into two items, "New File..." | |
2169 and "Open File...". "Open File..." now opens only existing files. This is | |
2170 to support existing GUI file selection dialogs better. | |
2171 | |
2172 +++ | |
2173 ** The file selection dialog for Gtk+, Mac, W32 and Motif/Lesstif can be | |
2174 disabled by customizing the variable `use-file-dialog'. | |
2175 | |
2176 +++ | |
2177 ** For Gtk+ version 2.4, you can make Emacs use the old file dialog | |
2178 by setting the variable `x-use-old-gtk-file-dialog' to t. Default is to use | |
2179 the new dialog. | |
2180 | |
2181 --- | |
2182 ** Emacs now responds to mouse-clicks on the mode-line, header-line and | |
2183 display margin, when run in an xterm. | |
2184 | |
2185 ** Improved key bindings support when running in an xterm. | |
2186 When emacs is running in an xterm more key bindings are available. The | |
2187 following should work: | |
2188 {C,S,C-S,A}-{right,left,up,down,prior,next,delete,insert,F1-12}. | |
2189 These key bindings work on xterm from X.org 6.8, they might not work on | |
2190 some older versions of xterm, or on some proprietary versions. | |
2191 | |
2192 ** Changes in support of colors on character terminals | |
2193 | |
2194 +++ | |
2195 *** The new command-line option --color=MODE lets you specify a standard | |
2196 mode for a tty color support. It is meant to be used on character | |
2197 terminals whose capabilities are not set correctly in the terminal | |
2198 database, or with terminal emulators which support colors, but don't | |
2199 set the TERM environment variable to a name of a color-capable | |
2200 terminal. "emacs --color" uses the same color commands as GNU `ls' | |
2201 when invoked with "ls --color", so if your terminal can support colors | |
2202 in "ls --color", it will support "emacs --color" as well. See the | |
2203 user manual for the possible values of the MODE parameter. | |
2204 | |
2205 --- | |
2206 *** Emacs now supports several character terminals which provide more | |
2207 than 8 colors. For example, for `xterm', 16-color, 88-color, and | |
2208 256-color modes are supported. Emacs automatically notes at startup | |
2209 the extended number of colors, and defines the appropriate entries for | |
2210 all of these colors. | |
2211 | |
2212 +++ | |
2213 *** Emacs now uses the full range of available colors for the default | |
2214 faces when running on a color terminal, including 16-, 88-, and | |
2215 256-color xterms. This means that when you run "emacs -nw" on an | |
2216 88-color or 256-color xterm, you will see essentially the same face | |
2217 colors as on X. | |
2218 | |
2219 --- | |
2220 *** There's a new support for colors on `rxvt' terminal emulator. | |
2221 | |
2222 +++ | |
2223 ** Passing resources on the command line now works on MS Windows. | |
2224 You can use --xrm to pass resource settings to Emacs, overriding any | |
2225 existing values. For example: | |
2226 | |
2227 emacs --xrm "Emacs.Background:red" --xrm "Emacs.Geometry:100x20" | |
2228 | |
2229 will start up Emacs on an initial frame of 100x20 with red background, | |
2230 irrespective of geometry or background setting on the Windows registry. | |
2231 | |
2232 --- | |
2233 ** On MS Windows, the "system caret" now follows the cursor. | |
2234 This enables Emacs to work better with programs that need to track | |
2235 the cursor, for example screen magnifiers and text to speech programs. | |
2236 | |
2237 --- | |
2238 ** Tooltips now work on MS Windows. | |
2239 See the Emacs 21.1 NEWS entry for tooltips for details. | |
2240 | |
2241 --- | |
2242 ** Images are now supported on MS Windows. | |
2243 PBM and XBM images are supported out of the box. Other image formats | |
2244 depend on external libraries. All of these libraries have been ported | |
2245 to Windows, and can be found in both source and binary form at | |
2246 http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/. Note that libpng also depends on | |
2247 zlib, and tiff depends on the version of jpeg that it was compiled | |
2248 against. For additional information, see nt/INSTALL. | |
2249 | |
2250 --- | |
2251 ** Sound is now supported on MS Windows. | |
2252 WAV format is supported on all versions of Windows, other formats such | |
2253 as AU, AIFF and MP3 may be supported in the more recent versions of | |
2254 Windows, or when other software provides hooks into the system level | |
2255 sound support for those formats. | |
2256 | |
2257 --- | |
2258 ** Different shaped mouse pointers are supported on MS Windows. | |
2259 The mouse pointer changes shape depending on what is under the pointer. | |
2260 | |
2261 --- | |
2262 ** Pointing devices with more than 3 buttons are now supported on MS Windows. | |
2263 The new variable `w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system' controls | |
2264 whether Emacs should handle the extra buttons itself (the default), or | |
2265 pass them to Windows to be handled with system-wide functions. | |
2266 | |
2267 --- | |
2268 ** Emacs takes note of colors defined in Control Panel on MS-Windows. | |
2269 The Control Panel defines some default colors for applications in much | |
2270 the same way as wildcard X Resources do on X. Emacs now adds these | |
2271 colors to the colormap prefixed by System (eg SystemMenu for the | |
2272 default Menu background, SystemMenuText for the foreground), and uses | |
2273 some of them to initialize some of the default faces. | |
2274 `list-colors-display' shows the list of System color names, in case | |
2275 you wish to use them in other faces. | |
2276 | |
2277 --- | |
2278 ** On MS Windows NT/W2K/XP, Emacs uses Unicode for clipboard operations. | |
2279 Those systems use Unicode internally, so this allows Emacs to share | |
2280 multilingual text with other applications. On other versions of | |
2281 MS Windows, Emacs now uses the appropriate locale coding-system, so | |
2282 the clipboard should work correctly for your local language without | |
2283 any customizations. | |
2284 | |
2285 --- | |
2286 ** On Mac OS, the value of the variable `keyboard-coding-system' is | |
2287 now dynamically changed according to the current keyboard script. The | |
2288 variable `mac-keyboard-text-encoding' and the constants | |
2289 `kTextEncodingMacRoman', `kTextEncodingISOLatin1', and | |
2290 `kTextEncodingISOLatin2' are obsolete. | |
701 | 2291 |
702 --- | 2292 --- |
703 ** sql changes. | 2293 ** sql changes. |
704 | 2294 |
705 *** The variable `sql-product' controls the highlightng of different | 2295 *** The variable `sql-product' controls the highlightng of different |
770 *** Added SQL->Start SQLi Session menu entry which calls the | 2360 *** Added SQL->Start SQLi Session menu entry which calls the |
771 appropriate sql-interactive-mode wrapper for the current setting of | 2361 appropriate sql-interactive-mode wrapper for the current setting of |
772 `sql-product'. | 2362 `sql-product'. |
773 | 2363 |
774 --- | 2364 --- |
2365 *** Support for the SQLite interpreter has been added to sql.el by calling | |
2366 'sql-sqlite'. | |
2367 | |
2368 --- | |
775 ** M-x view-file and commands that use it now avoid interfering | 2369 ** M-x view-file and commands that use it now avoid interfering |
776 with special modes such as Tar mode. | 2370 with special modes such as Tar mode. |
777 | 2371 |
778 ** Enhancements to apropos commands: | 2372 +++ |
779 | 2373 ** Filesets are collections of files. You can define a fileset in |
780 +++ | 2374 various ways, such as based on a directory tree or based on |
781 *** The apropos commands now accept a list of words to match. | 2375 program files that include other program files. |
782 When more than one word is specified, at least two of those words must | 2376 |
783 be present for an item to match. Regular expression matching is still | 2377 Once you have defined a fileset, you can perform various operations on |
784 available. | 2378 all the files in it, such as visiting them or searching and replacing |
785 | 2379 in them. |
786 +++ | 2380 |
787 *** The new option `apropos-sort-by-scores' causes the matching items | 2381 --- |
788 to be sorted according to their score. The score for an item is a | 2382 ** Commands winner-redo and winner-undo, from winner.el, are now bound to |
789 number calculated to indicate how well the item matches the words or | 2383 C-c <left> and C-c <right>, respectively. This is an incompatible change. |
790 regular expression that you entered to the apropos command. The best | |
791 match is listed first, and the calculated score is shown for each | |
792 matching item. | |
793 | |
794 +++ | |
795 ** The old bindings C-M-delete and C-M-backspace have been deleted, | |
796 since there are situations where one or the other will shut down | |
797 the operating system or your X server. | |
798 | |
799 --- | |
800 ** New minor mode, Visible mode, toggles invisibility in the current buffer. | |
801 When enabled, it makes all invisible text visible. When disabled, it | |
802 restores the previous value of `buffer-invisibility-spec'. | |
803 | |
804 --- | |
805 ** New command `kill-whole-line' kills an entire line at once. | |
806 By default, it is bound to C-S-<backspace>. | |
807 | |
808 --- | |
809 ** New commands to operate on pairs of open and close characters: | |
810 `insert-pair', `delete-pair', `raise-sexp'. | |
811 | |
812 +++ | |
813 ** A prefix argument of C-M-q in Emacs Lisp mode pretty-printifies the | |
814 list starting after point. | |
815 | |
816 ** Dired mode: | |
817 | |
818 --- | |
819 *** New faces dired-header, dired-mark, dired-marked, dired-flagged, | |
820 dired-ignored, dired-directory, dired-symlink, dired-warning | |
821 introduced for Dired mode instead of font-lock faces. | |
822 | |
823 +++ | |
824 *** New Dired command `dired-compare-directories' marks files | |
825 with different file attributes in two dired buffers. | |
826 | |
827 +++ | |
828 *** New Dired command `dired-do-touch' (bound to T) changes timestamps | |
829 of marked files with the value entered in the minibuffer. | |
830 | |
831 +++ | |
832 *** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now | |
833 control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded | |
834 by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards | |
835 too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the | |
836 doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent | |
837 special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'. | |
838 | |
839 +++ | |
840 *** In Dired, the w command now copies the current line's file name | |
841 into the kill ring. With a zero prefix arg, copies absolute file names. | |
842 | |
843 +++ | |
844 ** Dired-x: | |
845 | |
846 +++ | |
847 *** Omitting files is now a minor mode, dired-omit-mode. The mode toggling | |
848 command is bound to M-o. A new command dired-mark-omitted, bound to * O, | |
849 marks omitted files. The variable dired-omit-files-p is obsoleted, use the | |
850 mode toggling function instead. | |
851 | |
852 +++ | |
853 ** find-file-read-only visits multiple files in read-only mode, | |
854 when the file name contains wildcard characters. | |
855 | |
856 +++ | |
857 ** find-alternate-file replaces the current file with multiple files, | |
858 when the file name contains wildcard characters. | |
859 | 2384 |
860 ** FFAP | 2385 ** FFAP |
861 | 2386 |
862 +++ | 2387 +++ |
863 *** New ffap commands and keybindings: C-x C-r (`ffap-read-only'), | 2388 *** New ffap commands and keybindings: C-x C-r (`ffap-read-only'), |
867 | 2392 |
868 --- | 2393 --- |
869 *** FFAP accepts wildcards in a file name by default. C-x C-f passes | 2394 *** FFAP accepts wildcards in a file name by default. C-x C-f passes |
870 it to `find-file' with non-nil WILDCARDS argument, which visits | 2395 it to `find-file' with non-nil WILDCARDS argument, which visits |
871 multiple files, and C-x d passes it to `dired'. | 2396 multiple files, and C-x d passes it to `dired'. |
872 | |
873 ** Info mode: | |
874 | |
875 +++ | |
876 *** A numeric prefix argument of `info' selects an Info buffer | |
877 with the number appended to the *info* buffer name (e.g. "*info*<2>"). | |
878 | |
879 --- | |
880 *** isearch in Info uses Info-search and searches through multiple nodes. | |
881 Before leaving the initial Info node isearch fails once with the error | |
882 message [initial node], and with subsequent C-s/C-r continues through | |
883 other nodes. When isearch fails for the rest of the manual, it wraps | |
884 aroung the whole manual to the top/final node. The user option | |
885 `Info-isearch-search' controls whether to use Info-search for isearch, | |
886 or the default isearch search function that wraps around the current | |
887 Info node. | |
888 | |
889 *** New search commands: `Info-search-case-sensitively' (bound to S), | |
890 `Info-search-backward', and `Info-search-next' which repeats the last | |
891 search without prompting for a new search string. | |
892 | |
893 *** New command `Info-history-forward' (bound to r and new toolbar icon) | |
894 moves forward in history to the node you returned from after using | |
895 `Info-history-back' (renamed from `Info-last'). | |
896 | |
897 *** New command `Info-history' (bound to L) displays a menu of visited nodes. | |
898 | |
899 *** New command `Info-toc' (bound to T) creates a node with table of contents | |
900 from the tree structure of menus of the current Info file. | |
901 | |
902 *** New command `info-apropos' searches the indices of the known | |
903 Info files on your system for a string, and builds a menu of the | |
904 possible matches. | |
905 | |
906 *** New command `Info-copy-current-node-name' (bound to w) copies | |
907 the current Info node name into the kill ring. With a zero prefix | |
908 arg, puts the node name inside the `info' function call. | |
909 | |
910 --- | |
911 *** New face `info-xref-visited' distinguishes visited nodes from unvisited | |
912 and a new option `Info-fontify-visited-nodes' to control this. | |
913 | |
914 *** http and ftp links in Info are now operational: they look like cross | |
915 references and following them calls `browse-url'. | |
916 | |
917 +++ | |
918 *** Info now hides node names in menus and cross references by default. | |
919 If you prefer the old behavior, you can set the new user option | |
920 `Info-hide-note-references' to nil. | |
921 | |
922 --- | |
923 *** Images in Info pages are supported. | |
924 Info pages show embedded images, in Emacs frames with image support. | |
925 Info documentation that includes images, processed with makeinfo | |
926 version 4.7 or newer, compiles to Info pages with embedded images. | |
927 | |
928 +++ | |
929 *** The default value for `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' is now nil. | |
930 | |
931 --- | |
932 *** Info-index offers completion. | |
933 | |
934 --- | |
935 ** Support for the SQLite interpreter has been added to sql.el by calling | |
936 'sql-sqlite'. | |
937 | |
938 ** BibTeX mode: | |
939 *** The new command bibtex-url browses a URL for the BibTeX entry at | |
940 point (bound to C-c C-l and mouse-2, RET on clickable fields). | |
941 | |
942 *** The new command bibtex-entry-update (bound to C-c C-u) updates | |
943 an existing BibTeX entry. | |
944 | |
945 *** New `bibtex-entry-format' option `required-fields', enabled by default. | |
946 | |
947 *** bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries can take values `plain', | |
948 `crossref', and `entry-class' which control the sorting scheme used | |
949 for BibTeX entries. `bibtex-sort-entry-class' controls the sorting | |
950 scheme `entry-class'. TAB completion for reference keys and | |
951 automatic detection of duplicates does not require anymore that | |
952 bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil. | |
953 | |
954 *** If the new variable bibtex-parse-keys-fast is non-nil, | |
955 use fast but simplified algorithm for parsing BibTeX keys. | |
956 | |
957 *** If the new variable bibtex-autoadd-commas is non-nil, | |
958 automatically add missing commas at end of BibTeX fields. | |
959 | |
960 *** The new variable bibtex-autofill-types contains a list of entry | |
961 types for which fields are filled automatically (if possible). | |
962 | |
963 *** The new command bibtex-complete completes word fragment before | |
964 point according to context (bound to M-tab). | |
965 | |
966 *** The new commands bibtex-find-entry and bibtex-find-crossref | |
967 locate entries and crossref'd entries (bound to C-c C-s and C-c C-x). | |
968 Crossref fields are clickable (bound to mouse-2, RET). | |
969 | |
970 *** In BibTeX mode the command fill-paragraph (bound to M-q) fills | |
971 individual fields of a BibTeX entry. | |
972 | |
973 *** The new variables bibtex-files and bibtex-file-path define a set | |
974 of BibTeX files that are searched for entry keys. | |
975 | |
976 *** The new command bibtex-validate-globally checks for duplicate keys | |
977 in multiple BibTeX files. | |
978 | |
979 *** The new command bibtex-copy-summary-as-kill pushes summary | |
980 of BibTeX entry to kill ring (bound to C-c C-t). | |
981 | |
982 +++ | |
983 ** When display margins are present in a window, the fringes are now | |
984 displayed between the margins and the buffer's text area, rather than | |
985 at the edges of the window. | |
986 | |
987 +++ | |
988 ** A window may now have individual fringe and scroll-bar settings, | |
989 in addition to the individual display margin settings. | |
990 | |
991 Such individual settings are now preserved when windows are split | |
992 horizontally or vertically, a saved window configuration is restored, | |
993 or when the frame is resized. | |
994 | |
995 +++ | |
996 ** New functions frame-current-scroll-bars and window-current-scroll-bars. | |
997 | |
998 These functions return the current locations of the vertical and | |
999 horizontal scroll bars in a frame or window. | |
1000 | |
1001 +++ | |
1002 ** Emacs now supports drag and drop for X. Dropping a file on a window | |
1003 opens it, dropping text inserts the text. Dropping a file on a dired | |
1004 buffer copies or moves the file to that directory. | |
1005 | |
1006 +++ | |
1007 ** Under X, mouse-wheel-mode is turned on by default. | |
1008 | |
1009 +++ | |
1010 ** The X resource useXIM can be used to turn off use of XIM, which may | |
1011 speed up Emacs with slow networking to the X server. | |
1012 | |
1013 If the configure option `--without-xim' was used to turn off use of | |
1014 XIM by default, the X resource useXIM can be used to turn it on. | |
1015 | |
1016 +++ | |
1017 ** The X resource cursorBlink can be used to turn off cursor blinking. | |
1018 | |
1019 +++ | |
1020 ** `undo-only' does an undo which does not redo any previous undo. | |
1021 | |
1022 --- | |
1023 ** `uniquify-strip-common-suffix' tells uniquify to prefer | |
1024 `file|dir1' and `file|dir2' to `file|dir1/subdir' and `file|dir2/subdir'. | |
1025 | |
1026 +++ | |
1027 ** If the user visits a file larger than `large-file-warning-threshold', | |
1028 Emacs prompts her for confirmation. | |
1029 | |
1030 --- | |
1031 ** A UTF-7 coding system is available in the library `utf-7'. | |
1032 | |
1033 --- | |
1034 ** GUD mode has its own tool bar for controlling execution of the inferior | |
1035 and other common debugger commands. | |
1036 | |
1037 --- | |
1038 ** recentf changes. | |
1039 | |
1040 The recent file list is now automatically cleanup when recentf mode is | |
1041 enabled. The new option `recentf-auto-cleanup' controls when to do | |
1042 automatic cleanup. | |
1043 | |
1044 The `recentf-keep' option replaces `recentf-keep-non-readable-files-p' | |
1045 and provides a more general mechanism to customize which file names to | |
1046 keep in the recent list. | |
1047 | |
1048 With the more advanced option: `recentf-filename-handler', you can | |
1049 specify a function that transforms filenames handled by recentf. For | |
1050 example, if set to `file-truename', the same file will not be in the | |
1051 recent list with different symbolic links. | |
1052 | |
1053 To follow naming convention, `recentf-menu-append-commands-flag' | |
1054 replaces the misnamed option `recentf-menu-append-commands-p'. The | |
1055 old name remains available as alias, but has been marked obsolete. | |
1056 | |
1057 +++ | |
1058 ** The default for the paper size (variable ps-paper-type) is taken | |
1059 from the locale. | |
1060 | |
1061 +++ | |
1062 ** Init file changes | |
1063 | |
1064 You can now put the init files .emacs and .emacs_SHELL under | |
1065 ~/.emacs.d or directly under ~. Emacs will find them in either place. | |
1066 | |
1067 --- | |
1068 ** partial-completion-mode now does partial completion on directory names. | |
1069 | 2397 |
1070 --- | 2398 --- |
1071 ** skeleton.el now supports using - to mark the skeleton-point without | 2399 ** skeleton.el now supports using - to mark the skeleton-point without |
1072 interregion interaction. @ has reverted to only setting | 2400 interregion interaction. @ has reverted to only setting |
1073 skeleton-positions and no longer sets skeleton-point. Skeletons | 2401 skeleton-positions and no longer sets skeleton-point. Skeletons |
1074 which used @ to mark skeleton-point independent of _ should now use - | 2402 which used @ to mark skeleton-point independent of _ should now use - |
1075 instead. The updated skeleton-insert docstring explains these new | 2403 instead. The updated skeleton-insert docstring explains these new |
1076 features along with other details of skeleton construction. | 2404 features along with other details of skeleton construction. |
1077 | 2405 |
1078 --- | 2406 --- |
1079 ** MH-E changes. | |
1080 | |
1081 Upgraded to MH-E version 7.82. There have been major changes since | |
1082 version 5.0.2; see MH-E-NEWS for details. | |
1083 | |
1084 +++ | |
1085 ** The `emacsclient' command understands the options `--eval' and | |
1086 `--display' which tell Emacs respectively to evaluate the given elisp | |
1087 expression and to use the given display when visiting files. | |
1088 | |
1089 +++ | |
1090 ** User option `server-mode' can be used to start a server process. | |
1091 | |
1092 +++ | |
1093 ** The mode line position information now comes before the major mode. | |
1094 When the file is maintained under version control, that information | |
1095 appears between the position information and the major mode. | |
1096 | |
1097 +++ | |
1098 ** C-x s (save-some-buffers) now offers an option `d' to diff a buffer | |
1099 against its file, so you can see what changes you would be saving. | |
1100 | |
1101 +++ | |
1102 ** You can now customize the use of window fringes. To control this | |
1103 for all frames, use M-x fringe-mode or the Show/Hide submenu of the | |
1104 top-level Options menu, or customize the `fringe-mode' variable. To | |
1105 control this for a specific frame, use the command M-x | |
1106 set-fringe-style. | |
1107 | |
1108 +++ | |
1109 ** There is a new user option `mail-default-directory' that allows you | |
1110 to specify the value of `default-directory' for mail buffers. This | |
1111 directory is used for auto-save files of mail buffers. It defaults to | |
1112 "~/". | |
1113 | |
1114 +++ | |
1115 ** When you are root, and you visit a file whose modes specify | |
1116 read-only, the Emacs buffer is now read-only too. Type C-x C-q if you | |
1117 want to make the buffer writable. (As root, you can in fact alter the | |
1118 file.) | |
1119 | |
1120 +++ | |
1121 ** The new command `revert-buffer-with-coding-system' (C-x RET r) | |
1122 revisits the current file using a coding system that you specify. | |
1123 | |
1124 +++ | |
1125 ** The new command `recode-file-name' changes the encoding of the name | |
1126 of a file. | |
1127 | |
1128 --- | |
1129 ** `ps-print' can now print characters from the mule-unicode charsets. | |
1130 | |
1131 Printing text with characters from the mule-unicode-* sets works with | |
1132 ps-print, provided that you have installed the appropriate BDF fonts. | |
1133 See the file INSTALL for URLs where you can find these fonts. | |
1134 | |
1135 --- | |
1136 ** The new options `buffers-menu-show-directories' and | |
1137 `buffers-menu-show-status' let you control how buffers are displayed | |
1138 in the menu dropped down when you click "Buffers" from the menu bar. | |
1139 | |
1140 `buffers-menu-show-directories' controls whether the menu displays | |
1141 leading directories as part of the file name visited by the buffer. | |
1142 If its value is `unless-uniquify', the default, directories are | |
1143 shown unless uniquify-buffer-name-style' is non-nil. The value of nil | |
1144 and t turn the display of directories off and on, respectively. | |
1145 | |
1146 `buffers-menu-show-status' controls whether the Buffers menu includes | |
1147 the modified and read-only status of the buffers. By default it is | |
1148 t, and the status is shown. | |
1149 | |
1150 Setting these variables directly does not take effect until next time | |
1151 the Buffers menu is regenerated. | |
1152 | |
1153 +++ | |
1154 ** The commands M-x customize-face and M-x customize-face-other-window | |
1155 now look at the character after point. If a face or faces are | |
1156 specified for that character, the commands by default customize those | |
1157 faces. | |
1158 | |
1159 --- | |
1160 ** New language environments: French, Ukrainian, Tajik, | |
1161 Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, UTF-8, Windows-1255, Welsh, Latin-6, | |
1162 Latin-7, Lithuanian, Latvian, Swedish, Slovenian, Croatian, Georgian, | |
1163 Italian, Russian, Malayalam, Tamil, Russian, Chinese-EUC-TW. (Set up | |
1164 automatically according to the locale.) | |
1165 | |
1166 --- | |
1167 ** Indian support has been updated. | |
1168 The in-is13194 coding system is now Unicode-based. CDAC fonts are | |
1169 assumed. There is a framework for supporting various | |
1170 Indian scripts, but currently only Devanagari, Malayalam and Tamil are | |
1171 supported. | |
1172 | |
1173 --- | |
1174 ** New input methods: latin-alt-postfix, latin-postfix, latin-prefix, | |
1175 ukrainian-computer, belarusian, bulgarian-bds, russian-computer, | |
1176 vietnamese-telex, lithuanian-numeric, lithuanian-keyboard, | |
1177 latvian-keyboard, welsh, georgian, rfc1345, ucs, sgml, | |
1178 bulgarian-phonetic, dutch, slovenian, croatian, malayalam-inscript, | |
1179 tamil-inscript. | |
1180 | |
1181 --- | |
1182 ** A new coding system `euc-tw' has been added for traditional Chinese | |
1183 in CNS encoding; it accepts both Big 5 and CNS as input; on saving, | |
1184 Big 5 is then converted to CNS. | |
1185 | |
1186 --- | |
1187 ** Many new coding systems are available by loading the `code-pages' | |
1188 library. These include complete versions of most of those in | |
1189 codepage.el, based on Unicode mappings. `codepage-setup' is now | |
1190 obsolete and is used only in the MS-DOS port of Emacs. windows-1252 | |
1191 and windows-1251 are preloaded since the former is so common and the | |
1192 latter is used by GNU locales. | |
1193 | |
1194 --- | |
1195 ** The utf-8/16 coding systems have been enhanced. | |
1196 By default, untranslatable utf-8 sequences are simply composed into | |
1197 single quasi-characters. User option `utf-translate-cjk-mode' (it is | |
1198 turned on by default) arranges to translate many utf-8 CJK character | |
1199 sequences into real Emacs characters in a similar way to the Mule-UCS | |
1200 system. As this loads a fairly big data on demand, people who are not | |
1201 interested in CJK characters may want to customize it to nil. | |
1202 You can augment/amend the CJK translation via hash tables | |
1203 `ucs-mule-cjk-to-unicode' and `ucs-unicode-to-mule-cjk'. The utf-8 | |
1204 coding system now also encodes characters from most of Emacs's | |
1205 one-dimensional internal charsets, specifically the ISO-8859 ones. | |
1206 The utf-16 coding system is affected similarly. | |
1207 | |
1208 --- | |
1209 ** New variable `utf-translate-cjk-unicode-range' controls which | |
1210 Unicode characters to translate in `utf-translate-cjk-mode'. | |
1211 | |
1212 --- | |
1213 ** iso-10646-1 (`Unicode') fonts can be used to display any range of | |
1214 characters encodable by the utf-8 coding system. Just specify the | |
1215 fontset appropriately. | |
1216 | |
1217 --- | |
1218 ** New command `ucs-insert' inserts a character specified by its | |
1219 unicode. | |
1220 | |
1221 +++ | |
1222 ** Limited support for character `unification' has been added. | |
1223 Emacs now knows how to translate between different representations of | |
1224 the same characters in various Emacs charsets according to standard | |
1225 Unicode mappings. This applies mainly to characters in the ISO 8859 | |
1226 sets plus some other 8-bit sets, but can be extended. For instance, | |
1227 translation works amongst the Emacs ...-iso8859-... charsets and the | |
1228 mule-unicode-... ones. | |
1229 | |
1230 By default this translation happens automatically on encoding. | |
1231 Self-inserting characters are translated to make the input conformant | |
1232 with the encoding of the buffer in which it's being used, where | |
1233 possible. | |
1234 | |
1235 You can force a more complete unification with the user option | |
1236 unify-8859-on-decoding-mode. That maps all the Latin-N character sets | |
1237 into Unicode characters (from the latin-iso8859-1 and | |
1238 mule-unicode-0100-24ff charsets) on decoding. Note that this mode | |
1239 will often effectively clobber data with an iso-2022 encoding. | |
1240 | |
1241 --- | |
1242 ** There is support for decoding Greek and Cyrillic characters into | |
1243 either Unicode (the mule-unicode charsets) or the iso-8859 charsets, | |
1244 when possible. The latter are more space-efficient. This is | |
1245 controlled by user option utf-fragment-on-decoding. | |
1246 | |
1247 +++ | |
1248 ** The new command `set-file-name-coding-system' (C-x RET F) sets | |
1249 coding system for encoding and decoding file names. A new menu item | |
1250 (Options->Mule->Set Coding Systems->For File Name) invokes this | |
1251 command. | |
1252 | |
1253 --- | |
1254 ** The scrollbar under LessTif or Motif has a smoother drag-scrolling. | |
1255 On the other hand, the size of the thumb does not represent the actual | |
1256 amount of text shown any more (only a crude approximation of it). | |
1257 | |
1258 --- | |
1259 ** The pop up menus for Lucid now stay up if you do a fast click and can | |
1260 be navigated with the arrow keys (like Gtk+, Mac and W32). | |
1261 | |
1262 +++ | |
1263 ** The Lucid menus can display multilingual text in your locale. You have | |
1264 to explicitly specify a fontSet resource for this to work, for example | |
1265 `-xrm "Emacs*fontSet: -*-helvetica-medium-r-*--*-120-*-*-*-*-*-*,*"'. | |
1266 | |
1267 --- | |
1268 ** Dialogs for Lucid/Athena and Lesstif/Motif now pops down when pressing | |
1269 ESC, like they do for Gtk+, Mac and W32. | |
1270 | |
1271 --- | |
1272 ** Dialogs and menus pop down when pressing C-g. | |
1273 | |
1274 --- | |
1275 ** The menu item "Open File..." has been split into two items, "New File..." | |
1276 and "Open File...". "Open File..." now opens only existing files. This is | |
1277 to support existing GUI file selection dialogs better. | |
1278 | |
1279 +++ | |
1280 ** The file selection dialog for Gtk+, Mac, W32 and Motif/Lesstif can be | |
1281 disabled by customizing the variable `use-file-dialog'. | |
1282 | |
1283 +++ | |
1284 ** For Gtk+ version 2.4, you can make Emacs use the old file dialog | |
1285 by setting the variable `x-use-old-gtk-file-dialog' to t. Default is to use | |
1286 the new dialog. | |
1287 | |
1288 +++ | |
1289 ** Emacs can produce an underscore-like (horizontal bar) cursor. | |
1290 The underscore cursor is set by putting `(cursor-type . hbar)' in | |
1291 default-frame-alist. It supports variable heights, like the `bar' | |
1292 cursor does. | |
1293 | |
1294 +++ | |
1295 ** On X, MS Windows, and Mac OS, the blinking cursor's "off" state is | |
1296 now controlled by the variable `blink-cursor-alist'. | |
1297 | |
1298 +++ | |
1299 ** Filesets are collections of files. You can define a fileset in | |
1300 various ways, such as based on a directory tree or based on | |
1301 program files that include other program files. | |
1302 | |
1303 Once you have defined a fileset, you can perform various operations on | |
1304 all the files in it, such as visiting them or searching and replacing | |
1305 in them. | |
1306 | |
1307 --- | |
1308 ** PO translation files are decoded according to their MIME headers | |
1309 when Emacs visits them. | |
1310 | |
1311 --- | |
1312 ** The game `mpuz' is enhanced. | |
1313 | |
1314 `mpuz' now allows the 2nd factor not to have two identical digits. By | |
1315 default, all trivial operations involving whole lines are performed | |
1316 automatically. The game uses faces for better visual feedback. | |
1317 | |
1318 --- | |
1319 ** The new variable `x-select-request-type' controls how Emacs | |
1320 requests X selection. The default value is nil, which means that | |
1321 Emacs requests X selection with types COMPOUND_TEXT and UTF8_STRING, | |
1322 and use the more appropriately result. | |
1323 | |
1324 +++ | |
1325 ** The parameters of automatic hscrolling can now be customized. | |
1326 The variable `hscroll-margin' determines how many columns away from | |
1327 the window edge point is allowed to get before automatic hscrolling | |
1328 will horizontally scroll the window. The default value is 5. | |
1329 | |
1330 The variable `hscroll-step' determines how many columns automatic | |
1331 hscrolling scrolls the window when point gets too close to the | |
1332 window edge. If its value is zero, the default, Emacs scrolls the | |
1333 window so as to center point. If its value is an integer, it says how | |
1334 many columns to scroll. If the value is a floating-point number, it | |
1335 gives the fraction of the window's width to scroll the window. | |
1336 | |
1337 The variable `automatic-hscrolling' was renamed to | |
1338 `auto-hscroll-mode'. The old name is still available as an alias. | |
1339 | |
1340 ** TeX modes: | |
1341 | |
1342 +++ | |
1343 *** C-c C-c prompts for a command to run, and tries to offer a good default. | |
1344 | |
1345 +++ | |
1346 *** The user option `tex-start-options-string' has been replaced | |
1347 by two new user options: `tex-start-options', which should hold | |
1348 command-line options to feed to TeX, and `tex-start-commands' which should hold | |
1349 TeX commands to use at startup. | |
1350 | |
1351 --- | |
1352 *** verbatim environments are now highlighted in courier by font-lock | |
1353 and super/sub-scripts are made into super/sub-scripts. | |
1354 | |
1355 +++ | |
1356 *** New major mode doctex-mode for *.dtx files. | |
1357 | |
1358 +++ | |
1359 ** New display feature: focus follows the mouse from one Emacs window | |
1360 to another, even within a frame. If you set the variable | |
1361 mouse-autoselect-window to non-nil value, moving the mouse to a | |
1362 different Emacs window will select that window (minibuffer window can | |
1363 be selected only when it is active). The default is nil, so that this | |
1364 feature is not enabled. | |
1365 | |
1366 +++ | |
1367 ** On X, when the window manager requires that you click on a frame to | |
1368 select it (give it focus), the selected window and cursor position | |
1369 normally changes according to the mouse click position. If you set | |
1370 the variable x-mouse-click-focus-ignore-position to t, the selected | |
1371 window and cursor position do not change when you click on a frame | |
1372 to give it focus. | |
1373 | |
1374 +++ | |
1375 ** The new command `describe-char' (C-u C-x =) pops up a buffer with | |
1376 description various information about a character, including its | |
1377 encodings and syntax, its text properties, how to input, overlays, and | |
1378 widgets at point. You can get more information about some of them, by | |
1379 clicking on mouse-sensitive areas or moving there and pressing RET. | |
1380 | |
1381 +++ | |
1382 ** The new command `multi-occur' is just like `occur', except it can | |
1383 search multiple buffers. There is also a new command | |
1384 `multi-occur-by-filename-regexp' which allows you to specify the | |
1385 buffers to search by their filename. Internally, Occur mode has been | |
1386 rewritten, and now uses font-lock, among other changes. | |
1387 | |
1388 +++ | |
1389 ** The default values of paragraph-start and indent-line-function have | |
1390 been changed to reflect those used in Text mode rather than those used | |
1391 in Indented-Text mode. | |
1392 | |
1393 --- | |
1394 ** New user option `query-replace-skip-read-only': when non-nil, | |
1395 `query-replace' and related functions simply ignore | |
1396 a match if part of it has a read-only property. | |
1397 | |
1398 +++ | |
1399 ** When used interactively, the commands `query-replace-regexp' and | |
1400 `replace-regexp' allow \,expr to be used in a replacement string, | |
1401 where expr is an arbitrary Lisp expression evaluated at replacement | |
1402 time. In many cases, this will be more convenient than using | |
1403 `query-replace-regexp-eval'. `\#' in a replacement string now refers | |
1404 to the count of replacements already made by the replacement command. | |
1405 All regular expression replacement commands now allow `\?' in the | |
1406 replacement string to specify a position where the replacement string | |
1407 can be edited for each replacement. | |
1408 | |
1409 +++ | |
1410 ** query-replace uses isearch lazy highlighting when the new user option | |
1411 `query-replace-lazy-highlight' is non-nil. | |
1412 | |
1413 --- | |
1414 ** The current match in query-replace is highlighted in new face | |
1415 `query-replace' which by default inherits from isearch face. | |
1416 | |
1417 +++ | |
1418 ** Emacs normally highlights mouse sensitive text whenever the mouse | |
1419 is over the text. By setting the new variable `mouse-highlight', you | |
1420 can optionally enable mouse highlighting only after you move the | |
1421 mouse, so that highlighting disappears when you press a key. You can | |
1422 also disable mouse highlighting. | |
1423 | |
1424 +++ | |
1425 ** You can now customize if selecting a region by dragging the mouse | |
1426 shall not copy the selected text to the kill-ring by setting the new | |
1427 variable mouse-drag-copy-region to nil. | |
1428 | |
1429 +++ | |
1430 ** font-lock: in modes like C and Lisp where the fontification assumes that | |
1431 an open-paren in column 0 is always outside of any string or comment, | |
1432 font-lock now highlights any such open-paren-in-column-zero in bold-red | |
1433 if it is inside a string or a comment, to indicate that it can cause | |
1434 trouble with fontification and/or indentation. | |
1435 | |
1436 +++ | |
1437 ** There's a new face `minibuffer-prompt'. | |
1438 Emacs adds this face to the list of text properties stored in the | |
1439 variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', which is used to display the | |
1440 prompt string. | |
1441 | |
1442 +++ | |
1443 ** The new face `mode-line-inactive' is used to display the mode line | |
1444 of non-selected windows. The `mode-line' face is now used to display | |
1445 the mode line of the currently selected window. | |
1446 | |
1447 The new variable `mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' controls whether | |
1448 the `mode-line-inactive' face is used. | |
1449 | |
1450 --- | |
1451 ** A menu item "Show/Hide" was added to the top-level menu "Options". | |
1452 This menu allows you to turn various display features on and off (such | |
1453 as the fringes, the tool bar, the speedbar, and the menu bar itself). | |
1454 You can also move the vertical scroll bar to either side here or turn | |
1455 it off completely. There is also a menu-item to toggle displaying of | |
1456 current date and time, current line and column number in the | |
1457 mode-line. | |
1458 | |
1459 --- | |
1460 ** Speedbar has moved from the "Tools" top level menu to "Show/Hide". | |
1461 | |
1462 +++ | |
1463 ** Emacs can now indicate in the mode-line the presence of new e-mail | |
1464 in a directory or in a file. See the documentation of the user option | |
1465 `display-time-mail-directory'. | |
1466 | |
1467 --- | |
1468 ** LDAP support now defaults to ldapsearch from OpenLDAP version 2. | |
1469 | |
1470 +++ | |
1471 ** You can now disable pc-selection-mode after enabling it. | |
1472 M-x pc-selection-mode behaves like a proper minor mode, and with no | |
1473 argument it toggles the mode. | |
1474 | |
1475 Turning off PC-Selection mode restores the global key bindings | |
1476 that were replaced by turning on the mode. | |
1477 | |
1478 +++ | |
1479 ** Emacs now displays a splash screen by default even if command-line | |
1480 arguments were given. The new command-line option --no-splash | |
1481 disables the splash screen; see also the variable | |
1482 `inhibit-startup-message' (which is also aliased as | |
1483 `inhibit-splash-screen'). | |
1484 | |
1485 ** Changes in support of colors on character terminals | |
1486 | |
1487 +++ | |
1488 *** The new command-line option --color=MODE lets you specify a standard | |
1489 mode for a tty color support. It is meant to be used on character | |
1490 terminals whose capabilities are not set correctly in the terminal | |
1491 database, or with terminal emulators which support colors, but don't | |
1492 set the TERM environment variable to a name of a color-capable | |
1493 terminal. "emacs --color" uses the same color commands as GNU `ls' | |
1494 when invoked with "ls --color", so if your terminal can support colors | |
1495 in "ls --color", it will support "emacs --color" as well. See the | |
1496 user manual for the possible values of the MODE parameter. | |
1497 | |
1498 --- | |
1499 *** Emacs now supports several character terminals which provide more | |
1500 than 8 colors. For example, for `xterm', 16-color, 88-color, and | |
1501 256-color modes are supported. Emacs automatically notes at startup | |
1502 the extended number of colors, and defines the appropriate entries for | |
1503 all of these colors. | |
1504 | |
1505 +++ | |
1506 *** Emacs now uses the full range of available colors for the default | |
1507 faces when running on a color terminal, including 16-, 88-, and | |
1508 256-color xterms. This means that when you run "emacs -nw" on an | |
1509 88-color or 256-color xterm, you will see essentially the same face | |
1510 colors as on X. | |
1511 | |
1512 --- | |
1513 *** There's a new support for colors on `rxvt' terminal emulator. | |
1514 | |
1515 +++ | |
1516 ** Emacs can now be invoked in full-screen mode on a windowed display. | |
1517 | |
1518 When Emacs is invoked on a window system, the new command-line options | |
1519 `--fullwidth', `--fullheight', and `--fullscreen' produce a frame | |
1520 whose width, height, or both width and height take up the entire | |
1521 screen size. (For now, this does not work with some window managers.) | |
1522 | |
1523 --- | |
1524 ** Emacs now tries to set up buffer coding systems for HTML/XML files | |
1525 automatically. | |
1526 | |
1527 +++ | |
1528 ** The new command `comint-insert-previous-argument' in comint-derived | |
1529 modes (shell-mode etc) inserts arguments from previous command lines, | |
1530 like bash's `ESC .' binding. It is bound by default to `C-c .', but | |
1531 otherwise behaves quite similarly to the bash version. | |
1532 | |
1533 +++ | |
1534 ** Changes in C-h bindings: | |
1535 | |
1536 C-h e displays the *Messages* buffer. | |
1537 | |
1538 C-h followed by a control character is used for displaying files | |
1539 that do not change: | |
1540 | |
1541 C-h C-f displays the FAQ. | |
1542 C-h C-e displays the PROBLEMS file. | |
1543 | |
1544 The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i | |
1545 have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S. | |
1546 | |
1547 C-h c, C-h k, C-h w, and C-h f now handle remapped interactive commands. | |
1548 | |
1549 - C-h c and C-h k report the actual command (after possible remapping) | |
1550 run by the key sequence. | |
1551 | |
1552 - C-h w and C-h f on a command which has been remapped now report the | |
1553 command it is remapped to, and the keys which can be used to run | |
1554 that command. | |
1555 | |
1556 For example, if C-k is bound to kill-line, and kill-line is remapped | |
1557 to new-kill-line, these commands now report: | |
1558 | |
1559 - C-h c and C-h k C-k reports: | |
1560 C-k runs the command new-kill-line | |
1561 | |
1562 - C-h w and C-h f kill-line reports: | |
1563 kill-line is remapped to new-kill-line which is on C-k, <deleteline> | |
1564 | |
1565 - C-h w and C-h f new-kill-line reports: | |
1566 new-kill-line is on C-k | |
1567 | |
1568 +++ | |
1569 ** Vertical scrolling is now possible within incremental search. | |
1570 To enable this feature, customize the new user option | |
1571 `isearch-allow-scroll'. User written commands which satisfy stringent | |
1572 constraints can be marked as "scrolling commands". See the Emacs manual | |
1573 for details. | |
1574 | |
1575 +++ | |
1576 ** C-w in incremental search now grabs either a character or a word, | |
1577 making the decision in a heuristic way. This new job is done by the | |
1578 command `isearch-yank-word-or-char'. To restore the old behavior, | |
1579 bind C-w to `isearch-yank-word' in `isearch-mode-map'. | |
1580 | |
1581 +++ | |
1582 ** C-y in incremental search now grabs the next line if point is already | |
1583 at the end of a line. | |
1584 | |
1585 +++ | |
1586 ** C-M-w deletes and C-M-y grabs a character in isearch mode. | |
1587 Another method to grab a character is to enter the minibuffer by `M-e' | |
1588 and to type `C-f' at the end of the search string in the minibuffer. | |
1589 | |
1590 +++ | |
1591 ** M-% typed in isearch mode invokes `query-replace' or | |
1592 `query-replace-regexp' (depending on search mode) with the current | |
1593 search string used as the string to replace. | |
1594 | |
1595 +++ | |
1596 ** Isearch no longer adds `isearch-resume' commands to the command | |
1597 history by default. To enable this feature, customize the new | |
1598 user option `isearch-resume-in-command-history'. | |
1599 | |
1600 +++ | |
1601 ** New user option `history-delete-duplicates'. | |
1602 If set to t when adding a new history element, all previous identical | |
1603 elements are deleted. | |
1604 | |
1605 +++ | |
1606 ** Yanking text now discards certain text properties that can | |
1607 be inconvenient when you did not expect them. The variable | |
1608 `yank-excluded-properties' specifies which ones. Insertion | |
1609 of register contents and rectangles also discards these properties. | |
1610 | |
1611 +++ | |
1612 ** Occur, Info, and comint-derived modes now support using | |
1613 M-x font-lock-mode to toggle fontification. The variable | |
1614 `Info-fontify' is no longer applicable; to disable fontification, | |
1615 remove `turn-on-font-lock' from `Info-mode-hook'. | |
1616 | |
1617 +++ | |
1618 ** M-x grep now tries to avoid appending `/dev/null' to the command line | |
1619 by using GNU grep `-H' option instead. M-x grep automatically | |
1620 detects whether this is possible or not the first time it is invoked. | |
1621 When `-H' is used, the grep command line supplied by the user is passed | |
1622 unchanged to the system to execute, which allows more complicated | |
1623 command lines to be used than was possible before. | |
1624 | |
1625 --- | |
1626 ** The face-customization widget has been reworked to be less confusing. | |
1627 In particular, when you enable a face attribute using the corresponding | |
1628 check-box, there's no longer a redundant `*' option in value selection | |
1629 for that attribute; the values you can choose are only those which make | |
1630 sense for the attribute. When an attribute is de-selected by unchecking | |
1631 its check-box, then the (now ignored, but still present temporarily in | |
1632 case you re-select the attribute) value is hidden. | |
1633 | |
1634 +++ | |
1635 ** When you set or reset a variable's value in a Customize buffer, | |
1636 the previous value becomes the "backup value" of the variable. | |
1637 You can go back to that backup value by selecting "Use Backup Value" | |
1638 under the "[State]" button. | |
1639 | |
1640 --- | |
1641 ** The new customization type `float' specifies numbers with floating | |
1642 point (no integers are allowed). | |
1643 | |
1644 +++ | |
1645 ** In GUD mode, when talking to GDB, C-x C-a C-j "jumps" the program | |
1646 counter to the specified source line (the one where point is). | |
1647 | |
1648 --- | |
1649 ** GUD mode improvements for jdb: | |
1650 | |
1651 *** Search for source files using jdb classpath and class | |
1652 information. Fast startup since there is no need to scan all | |
1653 source files up front. There is also no need to create and maintain | |
1654 lists of source directories to scan. Look at `gud-jdb-use-classpath' | |
1655 and `gud-jdb-classpath' customization variables documentation. | |
1656 | |
1657 *** Supports the standard breakpoint (gud-break, gud-clear) | |
1658 set/clear operations from java source files under the classpath, stack | |
1659 traversal (gud-up, gud-down), and run until current stack finish | |
1660 (gud-finish). | |
1661 | |
1662 *** Supports new jdb (Java 1.2 and later) in addition to oldjdb | |
1663 (Java 1.1 jdb). | |
1664 | |
1665 *** The previous method of searching for source files has been | |
1666 preserved in case someone still wants/needs to use it. | |
1667 Set gud-jdb-use-classpath to nil. | |
1668 | |
1669 Added Customization Variables | |
1670 | |
1671 *** gud-jdb-command-name. What command line to use to invoke jdb. | |
1672 | |
1673 *** gud-jdb-use-classpath. Allows selection of java source file searching | |
1674 method: set to t for new method, nil to scan gud-jdb-directories for | |
1675 java sources (previous method). | |
1676 | |
1677 *** gud-jdb-directories. List of directories to scan and search for java | |
1678 classes using the original gud-jdb method (if gud-jdb-use-classpath | |
1679 is nil). | |
1680 | |
1681 Minor Improvements | |
1682 | |
1683 *** The STARTTLS elisp wrapper (starttls.el) can now use GNUTLS | |
1684 instead of the OpenSSL based "starttls" tool. For backwards | |
1685 compatibility, it prefers "starttls", but you can toggle | |
1686 `starttls-use-gnutls' to switch to GNUTLS (or simply remove the | |
1687 "starttls" tool). | |
1688 | |
1689 *** Do not allow debugger output history variable to grow without bounds. | |
1690 | |
1691 +++ | |
1692 ** hide-ifdef-mode now uses overlays rather than selective-display | |
1693 to hide its text. This should be mostly transparent but slightly | |
1694 changes the behavior of motion commands like C-e and C-p. | |
1695 | |
1696 +++ | |
1697 ** Unquoted `$' in file names do not signal an error any more when | |
1698 the corresponding environment variable does not exist. | |
1699 Instead, the `$ENVVAR' text is left as is, so that `$$' quoting | |
1700 is only rarely needed. | |
1701 | |
1702 --- | |
1703 ** JIT-lock changes | |
1704 *** jit-lock can now be delayed with `jit-lock-defer-time'. | |
1705 | |
1706 If this variable is non-nil, its value should be the amount of Emacs | |
1707 idle time in seconds to wait before starting fontification. For | |
1708 example, if you set `jit-lock-defer-time' to 0.25, fontification will | |
1709 only happen after 0.25s of idle time. | |
1710 | |
1711 *** contextual refontification is now separate from stealth fontification. | |
1712 | |
1713 jit-lock-defer-contextually is renamed jit-lock-contextually and | |
1714 jit-lock-context-time determines the delay after which contextual | |
1715 refontification takes place. | |
1716 | |
1717 +++ | |
1718 ** Marking commands extend the region when invoked multiple times. If | |
1719 you hit M-C-SPC (mark-sexp), M-@ (mark-word), M-h (mark-paragraph), or | |
1720 C-M-h (mark-defun) repeatedly, the marked region extends each time, so | |
1721 you can mark the next two sexps with M-C-SPC M-C-SPC, for example. | |
1722 This feature also works for mark-end-of-sentence, if you bind that to | |
1723 a key. It also extends the region when the mark is active in Transient | |
1724 Mark mode, regardless of the last command. To start a new region with | |
1725 one of marking commands in Transient Mark mode, you can deactivate the | |
1726 active region with C-g, or set the new mark with C-SPC. | |
1727 | |
1728 +++ | |
1729 ** Some commands do something special in Transient Mark mode when the | |
1730 mark is active--for instance, they limit their operation to the | |
1731 region. Even if you don't normally use Transient Mark mode, you might | |
1732 want to get this behavior from a particular command. There are two | |
1733 ways you can enable Transient Mark mode and activate the mark, for one | |
1734 command only. | |
1735 | |
1736 One method is to type C-SPC C-SPC; this enables Transient Mark mode | |
1737 and sets the mark at point. The other method is to type C-u C-x C-x. | |
1738 This enables Transient Mark mode temporarily but does not alter the | |
1739 mark or the region. | |
1740 | |
1741 After these commands, Transient Mark mode remains enabled until you | |
1742 deactivate the mark. That typically happens when you type a command | |
1743 that alters the buffer, but you can also deactivate the mark by typing | |
1744 C-g. | |
1745 | |
1746 +++ | |
1747 ** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a | |
1748 previous mark, i.e. C-u C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... cycles through the | |
1749 mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC to set the mark immediately after a jump. | |
1750 | |
1751 +++ | |
1752 ** Movement commands `beginning-of-buffer', `end-of-buffer', | |
1753 `beginning-of-defun', `end-of-defun' do not set the mark if the mark | |
1754 is already active in Transient Mark mode. | |
1755 | |
1756 +++ | |
1757 ** In the *Occur* buffer, `o' switches to it in another window, and | |
1758 C-o displays the current line's occurrence in another window without | |
1759 switching to it. | |
1760 | |
1761 +++ | |
1762 ** When you specify a frame size with --geometry, the size applies to | |
1763 all frames you create. A position specified with --geometry only | |
1764 affects the initial frame. | |
1765 | |
1766 +++ | |
1767 ** M-h (mark-paragraph) now accepts a prefix arg. | |
1768 With positive arg, M-h marks the current and the following paragraphs; | |
1769 if the arg is negative, it marks the current and the preceding | |
1770 paragraphs. | |
1771 | |
1772 +++ | |
1773 ** The variables dired-free-space-program and dired-free-space-args | |
1774 have been renamed to directory-free-space-program and | |
1775 directory-free-space-args, and they now apply whenever Emacs puts a | |
1776 directory listing into a buffer. | |
1777 | |
1778 --- | |
1779 ** mouse-wheels can now scroll a specific fraction of the window | |
1780 (rather than a fixed number of lines) and the scrolling is `progressive'. | |
1781 | |
1782 --- | |
1783 ** Unexpected yanking of text due to accidental clicking on the mouse | |
1784 wheel button (typically mouse-2) during wheel scrolling is now avoided. | |
1785 This behavior can be customized via the mouse-wheel-click-event and | |
1786 mouse-wheel-inhibit-click-time variables. | |
1787 | |
1788 +++ | |
1789 ** The keyboard-coding-system is now automatically set based on your | |
1790 current locale settings if you are not using a window system. This | |
1791 may mean that the META key doesn't work but generates non-ASCII | |
1792 characters instead, depending on how the terminal (or terminal | |
1793 emulator) works. Use `set-keyboard-coding-system' (or customize | |
1794 keyboard-coding-system) if you prefer META to work (the old default) | |
1795 or if the locale doesn't describe the character set actually generated | |
1796 by the keyboard. See Info node `Single-Byte Character Support'. | |
1797 | |
1798 +++ | |
1799 ** Emacs now reads the standard abbrevs file ~/.abbrev_defs | |
1800 automatically at startup, if it exists. When Emacs offers to save | |
1801 modified buffers, it saves the abbrevs too if they have changed. It | |
1802 can do this either silently or asking for confirmation first, | |
1803 according to the value of `save-abbrevs'. | |
1804 | |
1805 +++ | |
1806 ** Display of hollow cursors now obeys the buffer-local value (if any) | |
1807 of `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' in the buffer that the cursor | |
1808 appears in. | |
1809 | |
1810 +++ | |
1811 ** The variable `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' can now be set to any | |
1812 of the recognized cursor types. | |
1813 | |
1814 --- | |
1815 ** The variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms' now has a third element that | |
1816 controls whether or not the function `make-auto-save-file-name' will | |
1817 attempt to construct a unique auto-save name (e.g. for remote files). | |
1818 | |
1819 +++ | |
1820 ** There is a new calendar package, icalendar.el, that can be used to | |
1821 convert Emacs diary entries to/from the iCalendar format. | |
1822 | |
1823 +++ | |
1824 ** Diary sexp entries can have custom marking in the calendar. | |
1825 Diary sexp functions which only apply to certain days (such as | |
1826 `diary-block' or `diary-cyclic') now take an optional parameter MARK, | |
1827 which is the name of a face or a single-character string indicating | |
1828 how to highlight the day in the calendar display. Specifying a | |
1829 single-character string as @var{mark} places the character next to the | |
1830 day in the calendar. Specifying a face highlights the day with that | |
1831 face. This lets you have different colors or markings for vacations, | |
1832 appointments, paydays or anything else using a sexp. | |
1833 | |
1834 +++ | |
1835 ** The new function `calendar-goto-day-of-year' (g D) prompts for a | |
1836 year and day number, and moves to that date. Negative day numbers | |
1837 count backward from the end of the year. | |
1838 | |
1839 +++ | |
1840 ** The new Calendar function `calendar-goto-iso-week' (g w) | |
1841 prompts for a year and a week number, and moves to the first | |
1842 day of that ISO week. | |
1843 | |
1844 --- | |
1845 ** The new variable `calendar-minimum-window-height' affects the | |
1846 window generated by the function `generate-calendar-window'. | |
1847 | |
1848 --- | |
1849 ** The functions `holiday-easter-etc' and `holiday-advent' now take | |
1850 optional arguments, in order to only report on the specified holiday | |
1851 rather than all. This makes customization of variables such as | |
1852 `christian-holidays' simpler. | |
1853 | |
1854 --- | |
1855 ** The function `simple-diary-display' now by default sets a header line. | |
1856 This can be controlled through the variables `diary-header-line-flag' | |
1857 and `diary-header-line-format'. | |
1858 | |
1859 +++ | |
1860 ** The procedure for activating appointment reminders has changed: use | |
1861 the new function `appt-activate'. The new variable | |
1862 `appt-display-format' controls how reminders are displayed, replacing | |
1863 appt-issue-message, appt-visible, and appt-msg-window. | |
1864 | |
1865 +++ | |
1866 ** The new functions `diary-from-outlook', `diary-from-outlook-gnus', | |
1867 and `diary-from-outlook-rmail' can be used to import diary entries | |
1868 from Outlook-format appointments in mail messages. The variable | |
1869 `diary-outlook-formats' can be customized to recognize additional | |
1870 formats. | |
1871 | |
1872 | |
1873 ** VC Changes | |
1874 | |
1875 +++ | |
1876 *** The key C-x C-q no longer checks files in or out, it only changes | |
1877 the read-only state of the buffer (toggle-read-only). We made this | |
1878 change because we held a poll and found that many users were unhappy | |
1879 with the previous behavior. If you do prefer this behavior, you | |
1880 can bind `vc-toggle-read-only' to C-x C-q in your .emacs: | |
1881 | |
1882 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-q" 'vc-toggle-read-only) | |
1883 | |
1884 The function `vc-toggle-read-only' will continue to exist. | |
1885 | |
1886 +++ | |
1887 *** There is a new user option `vc-cvs-global-switches' that allows | |
1888 you to specify switches that are passed to any CVS command invoked | |
1889 by VC. These switches are used as "global options" for CVS, which | |
1890 means they are inserted before the command name. For example, this | |
1891 allows you to specify a compression level using the "-z#" option for | |
1892 CVS. | |
1893 | |
1894 +++ | |
1895 *** New backends for Subversion and Meta-CVS. | |
1896 | |
1897 ** EDiff changes. | |
1898 | |
1899 +++ | |
1900 *** When comparing directories. | |
1901 Typing D brings up a buffer that lists the differences between the contents of | |
1902 directories. Now it is possible to use this buffer to copy the missing files | |
1903 from one directory to another. | |
1904 | |
1905 +++ | |
1906 *** When comparing files or buffers. | |
1907 Typing the = key now offers to perform the word-by-word comparison of the | |
1908 currently highlighted regions in an inferior Ediff session. If you answer 'n' | |
1909 then it reverts to the old behavior and asks the user to select regions for | |
1910 comparison. | |
1911 | |
1912 *** The new command `ediff-backup' compares a file with its most recent | |
1913 backup using `ediff'. If you specify the name of a backup file, | |
1914 `ediff-backup' compares it with the file of which it is a backup. | |
1915 | |
1916 +++ | |
1917 ** Etags changes. | |
1918 | |
1919 *** New regular expressions features | |
1920 | |
1921 **** New syntax for regular expressions, multi-line regular expressions. | |
1922 The syntax --ignore-case-regexp=/regex/ is now undocumented and retained | |
1923 only for backward compatibility. The new equivalent syntax is | |
1924 --regex=/regex/i. More generally, it is --regex=/TAGREGEX/TAGNAME/MODS, | |
1925 where `/TAGNAME' is optional, as usual, and MODS is a string of 0 or | |
1926 more characters among `i' (ignore case), `m' (multi-line) and `s' | |
1927 (single-line). The `m' and `s' modifiers behave as in Perl regular | |
1928 expressions: `m' allows regexps to match more than one line, while `s' | |
1929 (which implies `m') means that `.' matches newlines. The ability to | |
1930 span newlines allows writing of much more powerful regular expressions | |
1931 and rapid prototyping for tagging new languages. | |
1932 | |
1933 **** Regular expressions can use char escape sequences as in Gcc. | |
1934 The escaped character sequence \a, \b, \d, \e, \f, \n, \r, \t, \v, | |
1935 respectively, stand for the ASCII characters BEL, BS, DEL, ESC, FF, NL, | |
1936 CR, TAB, VT, | |
1937 | |
1938 **** Regular expressions can be bound to a given language. | |
1939 The syntax --regex={LANGUAGE}REGEX means that REGEX is used to make tags | |
1940 only for files of language LANGUAGE, and ignored otherwise. This is | |
1941 particularly useful when storing regexps in a file. | |
1942 | |
1943 **** Regular expressions can be read from a file. | |
1944 The --regex=@regexfile option means read the regexps from a file, one | |
1945 per line. Lines beginning with space or tab are ignored. | |
1946 | |
1947 *** New language parsing features | |
1948 | |
1949 **** The `::' qualifier triggers C++ parsing in C file. | |
1950 Previously, only the `template' and `class' keywords had this effect. | |
1951 | |
1952 **** The gnucc __attribute__ keyword is now recognised and ignored. | |
1953 | |
1954 **** New language HTML. | |
1955 Title and h1, h2, h3 are tagged. Also, tags are generated when name= is | |
1956 used inside an anchor and whenever id= is used. | |
1957 | |
1958 **** In Makefiles, constants are tagged. | |
1959 If you want the old behavior instead, thus avoiding to increase the | |
1960 size of the tags file, use the --no-globals option. | |
1961 | |
1962 **** New language Lua. | |
1963 All functions are tagged. | |
1964 | |
1965 **** In Perl, packages are tags. | |
1966 Subroutine tags are named from their package. You can jump to sub tags | |
1967 as you did before, by the sub name, or additionally by looking for | |
1968 package::sub. | |
1969 | |
1970 **** In Prolog, etags creates tags for rules in addition to predicates. | |
1971 | |
1972 **** New language PHP. | |
1973 Tags are functions, classes and defines. | |
1974 If the --members option is specified to etags, tags are variables also. | |
1975 | |
1976 **** New default keywords for TeX. | |
1977 The new keywords are def, newcommand, renewcommand, newenvironment and | |
1978 renewenvironment. | |
1979 | |
1980 *** Honour #line directives. | |
1981 When Etags parses an input file that contains C preprocessor's #line | |
1982 directives, it creates tags using the file name and line number | |
1983 specified in those directives. This is useful when dealing with code | |
1984 created from Cweb source files. When Etags tags the generated file, it | |
1985 writes tags pointing to the source file. | |
1986 | |
1987 *** New option --parse-stdin=FILE. | |
1988 This option is mostly useful when calling etags from programs. It can | |
1989 be used (only once) in place of a file name on the command line. Etags | |
1990 reads from standard input and marks the produced tags as belonging to | |
1991 the file FILE. | |
1992 | |
1993 +++ | |
1994 ** CC Mode changes. | |
1995 | |
1996 *** Font lock support. | |
1997 CC Mode now provides font lock support for all its languages. This | |
1998 supersedes the font lock patterns that have been in the core font lock | |
1999 package for C, C++, Java and Objective-C. Like indentation, font | |
2000 locking is done in a uniform way across all languages (except the new | |
2001 AWK mode - see below). That means that the new font locking will be | |
2002 different from the old patterns in various details for most languages. | |
2003 | |
2004 The main goal of the font locking in CC Mode is accuracy, to provide a | |
2005 dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like | |
2006 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others like | |
2007 declarations and types can be very tricky. CC Mode can go to great | |
2008 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when | |
2009 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly | |
2010 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can | |
2011 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the | |
2012 variable font-lock-maximum-decoration. | |
2013 | |
2014 Note that the most demanding font lock level has been tuned with lazy | |
2015 fontification in mind, i.e. there should be a support mode that waits | |
2016 with the fontification until the text is actually shown | |
2017 (e.g. Just-in-time Lock mode, which is the default, or Lazy Lock | |
2018 mode). Fontifying a file with several thousand lines in one go can | |
2019 take the better part of a minute. | |
2020 | |
2021 **** The (c|c++|objc|java|idl|pike)-font-lock-extra-types variables | |
2022 are now used by CC Mode to recognize identifiers that are certain to | |
2023 be types. (They are also used in cases that aren't related to font | |
2024 locking.) At the maximum decoration level, types are often recognized | |
2025 properly anyway, so these variables should be fairly restrictive and | |
2026 not contain patterns for uncertain types. | |
2027 | |
2028 **** Support for documentation comments. | |
2029 There is a "plugin" system to fontify documentation comments like | |
2030 Javadoc and the markup within them. It's independent of the host | |
2031 language, so it's possible to e.g. turn on Javadoc font locking in C | |
2032 buffers. See the variable c-doc-comment-style for details. | |
2033 | |
2034 Currently two kinds of doc comment styles are recognized: Suns Javadoc | |
2035 and Autodoc which is used in Pike. This is by no means a complete | |
2036 list of the most common tools; if your doc comment extractor of choice | |
2037 is missing then please drop a note to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org. | |
2038 | |
2039 **** Better handling of C++ templates. | |
2040 As a side effect of the more accurate font locking, C++ templates are | |
2041 now handled much better. The angle brackets that delimit them are | |
2042 given parenthesis syntax so that they can be navigated like other | |
2043 parens. | |
2044 | |
2045 This also improves indentation of templates, although there still is | |
2046 work to be done in that area. E.g. it's required that multiline | |
2047 template clauses are written in full and then refontified to be | |
2048 recognized, and the indentation of nested templates is a bit odd and | |
2049 not as configurable as it ought to be. | |
2050 | |
2051 **** Improved handling of Objective-C and CORBA IDL. | |
2052 Especially the support for Objective-C and IDL has gotten an overhaul. | |
2053 The special "@" declarations in Objective-C are handled correctly. | |
2054 All the keywords used in CORBA IDL, PSDL, and CIDL are recognized and | |
2055 handled correctly, also wrt indentation. | |
2056 | |
2057 *** Support for the AWK language. | |
2058 Support for the AWK language has been introduced. The implementation is | |
2059 based around GNU AWK version 3.1, but it should work pretty well with | |
2060 any AWK. As yet, not all features of CC Mode have been adapted for AWK. | |
2061 Here is a summary: | |
2062 | |
2063 **** Indentation Engine | |
2064 The CC Mode indentation engine fully supports AWK mode. | |
2065 | |
2066 AWK mode handles code formatted in the conventional AWK fashion: `{'s | |
2067 which start actions, user-defined functions, or compound statements are | |
2068 placed on the same line as the associated construct; the matching `}'s | |
2069 are normally placed under the start of the respective pattern, function | |
2070 definition, or structured statement. | |
2071 | |
2072 The predefined indentation functions haven't yet been adapted for AWK | |
2073 mode, though some of them may work serendipitously. There shouldn't be | |
2074 any problems writing custom indentation functions for AWK mode. | |
2075 | |
2076 The command C-c C-q (c-indent-defun) hasn't yet been adapted for AWK, | |
2077 though in practice it works properly nearly all the time. Should it | |
2078 fail, explicitly set the region around the function (using C-u C-SPC: | |
2079 C-M-h probably won't work either) then do C-M-\ (indent-region). | |
2080 | |
2081 **** Font Locking | |
2082 There is a single level of font locking in AWK mode, rather than the | |
2083 three distinct levels the other modes have. There are several | |
2084 idiosyncrasies in AWK mode's font-locking due to the peculiarities of | |
2085 the AWK language itself. | |
2086 | |
2087 **** Comment Commands | |
2088 M-; (indent-for-comment) works fine. None of the other CC Mode | |
2089 comment formatting commands have yet been adapted for AWK mode. | |
2090 | |
2091 **** Movement Commands | |
2092 Most of the movement commands work in AWK mode. The most important | |
2093 exceptions are M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) and M-e | |
2094 (c-end-of-statement) which haven't yet been adapted. | |
2095 | |
2096 The notion of "defun" has been augmented to include AWK pattern-action | |
2097 pairs. C-M-a (c-awk-beginning-of-defun) and C-M-e (c-awk-end-of-defun) | |
2098 recognise these pattern-action pairs, as well as user defined | |
2099 functions. | |
2100 | |
2101 **** Auto-newline Insertion and Clean-ups | |
2102 Auto-newline insertion hasn't yet been adapted for AWK. Some of | |
2103 the clean-ups can actually convert good AWK code into syntactically | |
2104 invalid code. These features are best disabled in AWK buffers. | |
2105 | |
2106 *** New syntactic symbols in IDL mode. | |
2107 The top level constructs "module" and "composition" (from CIDL) are | |
2108 now handled like "namespace" in C++: They are given syntactic symbols | |
2109 module-open, module-close, inmodule, composition-open, | |
2110 composition-close, and incomposition. | |
2111 | |
2112 *** New functions to do hungry delete without enabling hungry delete mode. | |
2113 The functions c-hungry-backspace and c-hungry-delete-forward can be | |
2114 bound to keys to get this feature without toggling a mode. | |
2115 Contributed by Kevin Ryde. | |
2116 | |
2117 *** Better control over require-final-newline. The variable that | |
2118 controls how to handle a final newline when the buffer is saved, | |
2119 require-final-newline, is now customizable on a per-mode basis through | |
2120 c-require-final-newline. That is a list of modes, and only those | |
2121 modes set require-final-newline. By default that's C, C++ and | |
2122 Objective-C. | |
2123 | |
2124 The specified modes set require-final-newline based on | |
2125 mode-require-final-newline, as usual. | |
2126 | |
2127 *** Format change for syntactic context elements. | |
2128 The elements in the syntactic context returned by c-guess-basic-syntax | |
2129 and stored in c-syntactic-context has been changed somewhat to allow | |
2130 attaching more information. They are now lists instead of single cons | |
2131 cells. E.g. a line that previously had the syntactic analysis | |
2132 | |
2133 ((inclass . 11) (topmost-intro . 13)) | |
2134 | |
2135 is now analysed as | |
2136 | |
2137 ((inclass 11) (topmost-intro 13)) | |
2138 | |
2139 In some cases there are more than one position given for a syntactic | |
2140 symbol. | |
2141 | |
2142 This change might affect code that call c-guess-basic-syntax directly, | |
2143 and custom lineup functions if they use c-syntactic-context. However, | |
2144 the argument given to lineup functions is still a single cons cell | |
2145 with nil or an integer in the cdr. | |
2146 | |
2147 *** API changes for derived modes. | |
2148 There have been extensive changes "under the hood" which can affect | |
2149 derived mode writers. Some of these changes are likely to cause | |
2150 incompatibilities with existing derived modes, but on the other hand | |
2151 care has now been taken to make it possible to extend and modify CC | |
2152 Mode with less risk of such problems in the future. | |
2153 | |
2154 **** New language variable system. | |
2155 See the comment blurb near the top of cc-langs.el. | |
2156 | |
2157 **** New initialization functions. | |
2158 The initialization procedure has been split up into more functions to | |
2159 give better control: c-basic-common-init, c-font-lock-init, and | |
2160 c-init-language-vars. | |
2161 | |
2162 *** Changes in analysis of nested syntactic constructs. | |
2163 The syntactic analysis engine has better handling of cases where | |
2164 several syntactic constructs appear nested on the same line. They are | |
2165 now handled as if each construct started on a line of its own. | |
2166 | |
2167 This means that CC Mode now indents some cases differently, and | |
2168 although it's more consistent there might be cases where the old way | |
2169 gave results that's more to one's liking. So if you find a situation | |
2170 where you think that the indentation has become worse, please report | |
2171 it to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org. | |
2172 | |
2173 **** New syntactic symbol substatement-label. | |
2174 This symbol is used when a label is inserted between a statement and | |
2175 its substatement. E.g: | |
2176 | |
2177 if (x) | |
2178 x_is_true: | |
2179 do_stuff(); | |
2180 | |
2181 *** Better handling of multiline macros. | |
2182 | |
2183 **** Syntactic indentation inside macros. | |
2184 The contents of multiline #define's are now analyzed and indented | |
2185 syntactically just like other code. This can be disabled by the new | |
2186 variable c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros. A new syntactic symbol | |
2187 cpp-define-intro has been added to control the initial indentation | |
2188 inside #define's. | |
2189 | |
2190 **** New lineup function c-lineup-cpp-define. | |
2191 Now used by default to line up macro continuation lines. The behavior | |
2192 of this function closely mimics the indentation one gets if the macro | |
2193 is indented while the line continuation backslashes are temporarily | |
2194 removed. If syntactic indentation in macros is turned off, it works | |
2195 much line c-lineup-dont-change, which was used earlier, but handles | |
2196 empty lines within the macro better. | |
2197 | |
2198 **** Automatically inserted newlines continues the macro if used within one. | |
2199 This applies to the newlines inserted by the auto-newline mode, and to | |
2200 c-context-line-break and c-context-open-line. | |
2201 | |
2202 **** Better alignment of line continuation backslashes. | |
2203 c-backslash-region tries to adapt to surrounding backslashes. New | |
2204 variable c-backslash-max-column which put a limit on how far out | |
2205 backslashes can be moved. | |
2206 | |
2207 **** Automatic alignment of line continuation backslashes. | |
2208 This is controlled by the new variable c-auto-align-backslashes. It | |
2209 affects c-context-line-break, c-context-open-line and newlines | |
2210 inserted in auto-newline mode. | |
2211 | |
2212 **** Line indentation works better inside macros. | |
2213 Regardless whether syntactic indentation and syntactic indentation | |
2214 inside macros are enabled or not, line indentation now ignores the | |
2215 line continuation backslashes. This is most noticeable when syntactic | |
2216 indentation is turned off and there are empty lines (save for the | |
2217 backslash) in the macro. | |
2218 | |
2219 *** indent-for-comment is more customizable. | |
2220 The behavior of M-; (indent-for-comment) is now configurable through | |
2221 the variable c-indent-comment-alist. The indentation behavior based | |
2222 on the preceding code on the line, e.g. to get two spaces after #else | |
2223 and #endif but indentation to comment-column in most other cases | |
2224 (something which was hardcoded earlier). | |
2225 | |
2226 *** New function c-context-open-line. | |
2227 It's the open-line equivalent of c-context-line-break. | |
2228 | |
2229 *** New lineup functions | |
2230 | |
2231 **** c-lineup-string-cont | |
2232 This lineup function lines up a continued string under the one it | |
2233 continues. E.g: | |
2234 | |
2235 result = prefix + "A message " | |
2236 "string."; <- c-lineup-string-cont | |
2237 | |
2238 **** c-lineup-cascaded-calls | |
2239 Lines up series of calls separated by "->" or ".". | |
2240 | |
2241 **** c-lineup-knr-region-comment | |
2242 Gives (what most people think is) better indentation of comments in | |
2243 the "K&R region" between the function header and its body. | |
2244 | |
2245 **** c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg | |
2246 Provides better indentation inside asm blocks. Contributed by Kevin | |
2247 Ryde. | |
2248 | |
2249 **** c-lineup-argcont | |
2250 Lines up continued function arguments after the preceding comma. | |
2251 Contributed by Kevin Ryde. | |
2252 | |
2253 *** Better caching of the syntactic context. | |
2254 CC Mode caches the positions of the opening parentheses (of any kind) | |
2255 of the lists surrounding the point. Those positions are used in many | |
2256 places as anchor points for various searches. The cache is now | |
2257 improved so that it can be reused to a large extent when the point is | |
2258 moved. The less it moves, the less needs to be recalculated. | |
2259 | |
2260 The effect is that CC Mode should be fast most of the time even when | |
2261 opening parens are hung (i.e. aren't in column zero). It's typically | |
2262 only the first time after the point is moved far down in a complex | |
2263 file that it'll take noticeable time to find out the syntactic | |
2264 context. | |
2265 | |
2266 *** Statements are recognized in a more robust way. | |
2267 Statements are recognized most of the time even when they occur in an | |
2268 "invalid" context, e.g. in a function argument. In practice that can | |
2269 happen when macros are involved. | |
2270 | |
2271 *** Improved the way c-indent-exp chooses the block to indent. | |
2272 It now indents the block for the closest sexp following the point | |
2273 whose closing paren ends on a different line. This means that the | |
2274 point doesn't have to be immediately before the block to indent. | |
2275 Also, only the block and the closing line is indented; the current | |
2276 line is left untouched. | |
2277 | |
2278 *** Added toggle for syntactic indentation. | |
2279 The function c-toggle-syntactic-indentation can be used to toggle | |
2280 syntactic indentation. | |
2281 | |
2282 +++ | |
2283 ** The command line option --no-windows has been changed to | |
2284 --no-window-system. The old one still works, but is deprecated. | |
2285 | |
2286 +++ | |
2287 ** The command `list-text-properties-at' has been deleted because | |
2288 C-u C-x = gives the same information and more. | |
2289 | |
2290 +++ | |
2291 ** `buffer-menu' and `list-buffers' now list buffers whose names begin | |
2292 with a space, when those buffers are visiting files. Normally buffers | |
2293 whose names begin with space are omitted. | |
2294 | |
2295 +++ | |
2296 ** You can now customize fill-nobreak-predicate to control where | |
2297 filling can break lines. The value is now normally a list of | |
2298 functions, but it can also be a single function, for compatibility. | |
2299 | |
2300 We provide two sample predicates, fill-single-word-nobreak-p and | |
2301 fill-french-nobreak-p, for use in the value of fill-nobreak-predicate. | |
2302 | |
2303 +++ | |
2304 ** New user option `add-log-always-start-new-record'. | |
2305 When this option is enabled, M-x add-change-log-entry always | |
2306 starts a new record regardless of when the last record is. | |
2307 | |
2308 +++ | |
2309 ** SGML mode has indentation and supports XML syntax. | |
2310 The new variable `sgml-xml-mode' tells SGML mode to use XML syntax. | |
2311 When this option is enabled, SGML tags are inserted in XML style, | |
2312 i.e., there is always a closing tag. | |
2313 By default, its setting is inferred on a buffer-by-buffer basis | |
2314 from the file name or buffer contents. | |
2315 | |
2316 +++ | |
2317 ** `xml-mode' is now an alias for `sgml-mode', which has XML support. | |
2318 | |
2319 --- | |
2320 ** Lisp mode now uses font-lock-doc-face for the docstrings. | |
2321 | |
2322 --- | |
2323 ** Perl mode has a new variable `perl-indent-continued-arguments'. | |
2324 | |
2325 --- | |
2326 ** Fortran mode does more font-locking by default. Use level 3 | |
2327 highlighting for the old default. | |
2328 | |
2329 +++ | |
2330 ** Fortran mode has a new variable `fortran-directive-re'. | |
2331 Adapt this to match the format of any compiler directives you use. | |
2332 Lines that match are never indented, and are given distinctive font-locking. | |
2333 | |
2334 +++ | |
2335 ** F90 mode and Fortran mode have new navigation commands | |
2336 `f90-end-of-block', `f90-beginning-of-block', `f90-next-block', | |
2337 `f90-previous-block', `fortran-end-of-block', | |
2338 `fortran-beginning-of-block'. | |
2339 | |
2340 --- | |
2341 ** F90 mode and Fortran mode have support for hs-minor-mode (hideshow). | |
2342 It cannot deal with every code format, but ought to handle a sizeable | |
2343 majority. | |
2344 | |
2345 --- | |
2346 ** The new function `f90-backslash-not-special' can be used to change | |
2347 the syntax of backslashes in F90 buffers. | |
2348 | |
2349 --- | |
2350 ** Prolog mode has a new variable `prolog-font-lock-keywords' | |
2351 to support use of font-lock. | |
2352 | |
2353 +++ | |
2354 ** `special-display-buffer-names' and `special-display-regexps' now | |
2355 understand two new boolean pseudo-frame-parameters `same-frame' and | |
2356 `same-window'. | |
2357 | |
2358 +++ | |
2359 ** M-x setenv now expands environment variables of the form `$foo' and | |
2360 `${foo}' in the specified new value of the environment variable. To | |
2361 include a `$' in the value, use `$$'. | |
2362 | |
2363 +++ | |
2364 ** File-name completion can now ignore directories. | |
2365 If an element of the list in `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a | |
2366 slash `/', it indicates a subdirectory that should be ignored when | |
2367 completing file names. Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions' | |
2368 which do not end in a slash are never considered when a completion | |
2369 candidate is a directory. | |
2370 | |
2371 +++ | |
2372 ** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only | |
2373 to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point, | |
2374 it remains unchanged. | |
2375 | |
2376 --- | |
2377 ** Enhanced visual feedback in *Completions* buffer. | |
2378 | |
2379 Completions lists use faces to highlight what all completions | |
2380 have in common and where they begin to differ. | |
2381 | |
2382 The common prefix shared by all possible completions uses the face | |
2383 `completions-common-part', while the first character that isn't the | |
2384 same uses the face `completions-first-difference'. By default, | |
2385 `completions-common-part' inherits from `default', and | |
2386 `completions-first-difference' inherits from `bold'. The idea of | |
2387 `completions-common-part' is that you can use it to make the common | |
2388 parts less visible than normal, so that the rest of the differing | |
2389 parts is, by contrast, slightly highlighted. | |
2390 | |
2391 +++ | |
2392 ** New user option `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu'. | |
2393 When loading many files, for instance with `emacs *', Emacs normally | |
2394 displays a buffer menu. This option turns the buffer menu off. | |
2395 | |
2396 --- | |
2397 ** Rmail now displays 5-digit message ids in its summary buffer. | |
2398 | |
2399 +++ | |
2400 ** Support for `movemail' from GNU mailutils was added to Rmail. | |
2401 This version of `movemail' allows to read mail from a wide range of | |
2402 mailbox formats, including remote POP3 and IMAP4 mailboxes with or | |
2403 without TLS encryption. If GNU mailutils is installed on the system | |
2404 and its version of `movemail' can be found in exec-path, it will be | |
2405 used instead of the native one. | |
2406 | |
2407 --- | |
2408 ** On MS Windows, the "system caret" now follows the cursor. | |
2409 This enables Emacs to work better with programs that need to track | |
2410 the cursor, for example screen magnifiers and text to speech programs. | |
2411 | |
2412 --- | |
2413 ** Tooltips now work on MS Windows. | |
2414 See the Emacs 21.1 NEWS entry for tooltips for details. | |
2415 | |
2416 --- | |
2417 ** Images are now supported on MS Windows. | |
2418 PBM and XBM images are supported out of the box. Other image formats | |
2419 depend on external libraries. All of these libraries have been ported | |
2420 to Windows, and can be found in both source and binary form at | |
2421 http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/. Note that libpng also depends on | |
2422 zlib, and tiff depends on the version of jpeg that it was compiled | |
2423 against. For additional information, see nt/INSTALL. | |
2424 | |
2425 --- | |
2426 ** Sound is now supported on MS Windows. | |
2427 WAV format is supported on all versions of Windows, other formats such | |
2428 as AU, AIFF and MP3 may be supported in the more recent versions of | |
2429 Windows, or when other software provides hooks into the system level | |
2430 sound support for those formats. | |
2431 | |
2432 --- | |
2433 ** Different shaped mouse pointers are supported on MS Windows. | |
2434 The mouse pointer changes shape depending on what is under the pointer. | |
2435 | |
2436 --- | |
2437 ** Pointing devices with more than 3 buttons are now supported on MS Windows. | |
2438 The new variable `w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system' controls | |
2439 whether Emacs should handle the extra buttons itself (the default), or | |
2440 pass them to Windows to be handled with system-wide functions. | |
2441 | |
2442 --- | |
2443 ** Emacs takes note of colors defined in Control Panel on MS-Windows. | |
2444 The Control Panel defines some default colors for applications in much | |
2445 the same way as wildcard X Resources do on X. Emacs now adds these | |
2446 colors to the colormap prefixed by System (eg SystemMenu for the | |
2447 default Menu background, SystemMenuText for the foreground), and uses | |
2448 some of them to initialize some of the default faces. | |
2449 `list-colors-display' shows the list of System color names, in case | |
2450 you wish to use them in other faces. | |
2451 | |
2452 --- | |
2453 ** On MS Windows NT/W2K/XP, Emacs uses Unicode for clipboard operations. | |
2454 Those systems use Unicode internally, so this allows Emacs to share | |
2455 multilingual text with other applications. On other versions of | |
2456 MS Windows, Emacs now uses the appropriate locale coding-system, so | |
2457 the clipboard should work correctly for your local language without | |
2458 any customizations. | |
2459 | |
2460 +++ | |
2461 ** Under X11, it is possible to swap Alt and Meta (and Super and Hyper). | |
2462 The new variables `x-alt-keysym', `x-hyper-keysym', `x-meta-keysym', | |
2463 and `x-super-keysym' can be used to choose which keysyms Emacs should | |
2464 use for the modifiers. For example, the following two lines swap | |
2465 Meta and Alt: | |
2466 (setq x-alt-keysym 'meta) | |
2467 (setq x-meta-keysym 'alt) | |
2468 | |
2469 +++ | |
2470 ** vc-annotate-mode enhancements | |
2471 | |
2472 In vc-annotate mode, you can now use the following key bindings for | |
2473 enhanced functionality to browse the annotations of past revisions, or | |
2474 to view diffs or log entries directly from vc-annotate-mode: | |
2475 | |
2476 P: annotates the previous revision | |
2477 N: annotates the next revision | |
2478 J: annotates the revision at line | |
2479 A: annotates the revision previous to line | |
2480 D: shows the diff of the revision at line with its previous revision | |
2481 L: shows the log of the revision at line | |
2482 W: annotates the workfile (most up to date) version | |
2483 | |
2484 +++ | |
2485 ** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d y' command to view the diffs | |
2486 between the local version of the file and yesterday's head revision | |
2487 in the repository. | |
2488 | |
2489 +++ | |
2490 ** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d r' command to view the changes | |
2491 anyone has committed to the repository since you last executed | |
2492 "checkout", "update" or "commit". That means using cvs diff options | |
2493 -rBASE -rHEAD. | |
2494 | |
2495 --- | |
2496 ** New variable `hs-set-up-overlay' allows customization of the overlay | 2407 ** New variable `hs-set-up-overlay' allows customization of the overlay |
2497 used to effect hiding for hideshow minor mode. Integration with isearch | 2408 used to effect hiding for hideshow minor mode. Integration with isearch |
2498 handles the overlay property `display' specially, preserving it during | 2409 handles the overlay property `display' specially, preserving it during |
2499 temporary overlay showing in the course of an isearch operation. | 2410 temporary overlay showing in the course of an isearch operation. |
2500 | 2411 |
2501 +++ | 2412 +++ |
2502 ** New command `recode-region' decodes the region again by a specified | 2413 ** hide-ifdef-mode now uses overlays rather than selective-display |
2503 coding system. | 2414 to hide its text. This should be mostly transparent but slightly |
2504 | 2415 changes the behavior of motion commands like C-e and C-p. |
2505 --- | 2416 |
2506 ** On Mac OS, the value of the variable `keyboard-coding-system' is | 2417 --- |
2507 now dynamically changed according to the current keyboard script. The | 2418 ** partial-completion-mode now does partial completion on directory names. |
2508 variable `mac-keyboard-text-encoding' and the constants | 2419 |
2509 `kTextEncodingMacRoman', `kTextEncodingISOLatin1', and | 2420 --- |
2510 `kTextEncodingISOLatin2' are obsolete. | 2421 ** The type-break package now allows `type-break-file-name' to be nil |
2422 and if so, doesn't store any data across sessions. This is handy if | |
2423 you don't want the .type-break file in your home directory or are | |
2424 annoyed by the need for interaction when you kill Emacs. | |
2425 | |
2426 --- | |
2427 ** `ps-print' can now print characters from the mule-unicode charsets. | |
2428 | |
2429 Printing text with characters from the mule-unicode-* sets works with | |
2430 ps-print, provided that you have installed the appropriate BDF fonts. | |
2431 See the file INSTALL for URLs where you can find these fonts. | |
2432 | |
2433 --- | |
2434 ** New command `strokes-global-set-stroke-string'. | |
2435 This is like `strokes-global-set-stroke', but it allows you to bind | |
2436 the stroke directly to a string to insert. This is convenient for | |
2437 using strokes as an input method. | |
2438 | |
2439 --- | |
2440 ** LDAP support now defaults to ldapsearch from OpenLDAP version 2. | |
2441 | |
2442 +++ | |
2443 ** You can now disable pc-selection-mode after enabling it. | |
2444 M-x pc-selection-mode behaves like a proper minor mode, and with no | |
2445 argument it toggles the mode. | |
2446 | |
2447 Turning off PC-Selection mode restores the global key bindings | |
2448 that were replaced by turning on the mode. | |
2449 | |
2450 --- | |
2451 ** `uniquify-strip-common-suffix' tells uniquify to prefer | |
2452 `file|dir1' and `file|dir2' to `file|dir1/subdir' and `file|dir2/subdir'. | |
2453 | |
2454 --- | |
2455 ** rx.el has new corresponding `symbol-end' and `symbol-start' elements. | |
2456 | |
2457 --- | |
2458 ** Support for `magic cookie' standout modes has been removed. | |
2459 Emacs will still work on terminals that require magic cookies in order | |
2460 to use standout mode, however they will not be able to display | |
2461 mode-lines in inverse-video. | |
2462 | |
2463 --- | |
2464 ** The game `mpuz' is enhanced. | |
2465 | |
2466 `mpuz' now allows the 2nd factor not to have two identical digits. By | |
2467 default, all trivial operations involving whole lines are performed | |
2468 automatically. The game uses faces for better visual feedback. | |
2469 | |
2470 --- | |
2471 ** display-battery has been replaced by display-battery-mode. | |
2472 | |
2473 --- | |
2474 ** calculator.el now has radix grouping mode, which is available when | |
2475 `calculator-output-radix' is non-nil. In this mode a separator | |
2476 character is used every few digits, making it easier to see byte | |
2477 boundries etc. For more info, see the documentation of the variable | |
2478 `calculator-radix-grouping-mode'. | |
2479 | |
2480 --- | |
2481 ** global-whitespace-mode is a new alias for whitespace-global-mode. | |
2482 | |
2483 +++ | |
2484 ** The command `list-text-properties-at' has been deleted because | |
2485 C-u C-x = gives the same information and more. | |
2486 | |
2487 --- | |
2488 ** fast-lock.el and lazy-lock.el are obsolete. Use jit-lock.el instead. | |
2489 | |
2490 --- | |
2491 ** iso-acc.el is now obsolete. Use one of the latin input methods instead. | |
2492 | |
2493 --- | |
2494 ** cplus-md.el has been removed to avoid problems with Custom. | |
2495 | |
2511 | 2496 |
2512 * New modes and packages in Emacs 22.1 | 2497 * New modes and packages in Emacs 22.1 |
2513 | 2498 |
2514 +++ | 2499 +++ |
2515 ** The new package longlines.el provides a minor mode for editing text | 2500 ** New package benchmark.el contains simple support for convenient |
2516 files composed of long lines, based on the `use-hard-newlines' | 2501 timing measurements of code (including the garbage collection component). |
2517 mechanism. The long lines are broken up by inserting soft newlines, | 2502 |
2518 which are automatically removed when saving the file to disk or | 2503 +++ |
2519 copying into the kill ring, clipboard, etc. By default, Longlines | 2504 ** Calc is now part of the Emacs distribution. |
2520 mode inserts soft newlines automatically during editing, a behavior | 2505 |
2521 referred to as "soft word wrap" in other text editors. This is | 2506 Calc is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written in |
2522 similar to Refill mode, but more reliable. To turn the word wrap | 2507 Emacs Lisp. Its documentation is in a separate manual; within Emacs, |
2523 feature off, set `longlines-auto-wrap' to nil. | 2508 type "C-h i m calc RET" to read that manual. A reference card is |
2509 available in `etc/calccard.tex' and `etc/calccard.ps'. | |
2510 | |
2511 --- | |
2512 ** `cfengine-mode' is a major mode for editing GNU Cfengine | |
2513 configuration files. | |
2524 | 2514 |
2525 +++ | 2515 +++ |
2526 ** The new package conf-mode.el handles thousands of configuration files, with | 2516 ** The new package conf-mode.el handles thousands of configuration files, with |
2527 varying syntaxes for comments (;, #, //, /* */ or !), assignment (var = value, | 2517 varying syntaxes for comments (;, #, //, /* */ or !), assignment (var = value, |
2528 var : value, var value or keyword var value) and sections ([section] or | 2518 var : value, var value or keyword var value) and sections ([section] or |
2529 section { }). Many files under /etc/, or with suffixes like .cf through | 2519 section { }). Many files under /etc/, or with suffixes like .cf through |
2530 .config, .properties (Java), .desktop (KDE/Gnome), .ini and many others are | 2520 .config, .properties (Java), .desktop (KDE/Gnome), .ini and many others are |
2531 recognized. | 2521 recognized. |
2532 | |
2533 +++ | |
2534 ** The new package dns-mode.el add syntax highlight of DNS master files. | |
2535 The key binding C-c C-s (`dns-mode-soa-increment-serial') can be used | |
2536 to increment the SOA serial. | |
2537 | |
2538 +++ | |
2539 ** The new package flymake.el does on-the-fly syntax checking of program | |
2540 source files. See the Flymake's Info manual for more details. | |
2541 | |
2542 --- | |
2543 ** The library tree-widget.el provides a new widget to display a set | |
2544 of hierarchical data as an outline. For example, the tree-widget is | |
2545 well suited to display a hierarchy of directories and files. | |
2546 | |
2547 +++ | |
2548 ** The wdired.el package allows you to use normal editing commands on Dired | |
2549 buffers to change filenames, permissions, etc... | |
2550 | |
2551 +++ | |
2552 ** The thumbs.el package allows you to preview image files as thumbnails | |
2553 and can be invoked from a Dired buffer. | |
2554 | |
2555 +++ | |
2556 ** Image files are normally visited in Image mode, which lets you toggle | |
2557 between viewing the image and viewing the text using C-c C-c. | |
2558 | |
2559 +++ | |
2560 ** The new python.el package is used to edit Python and Jython programs. | |
2561 | |
2562 --- | |
2563 ** The URL package (which had been part of W3) is now part of Emacs. | |
2564 | |
2565 +++ | |
2566 ** The new global minor mode `size-indication-mode' (off by default) | |
2567 shows the size of accessible part of the buffer on the mode line. | |
2568 | |
2569 --- | |
2570 ** GDB-Script-mode is used for files like .gdbinit. | |
2571 | |
2572 --- | |
2573 ** Ido mode is now part of the Emacs distribution. | |
2574 | |
2575 The ido (interactively do) package is an extension of the iswitchb | |
2576 package to do interactive opening of files and directories in addition | |
2577 to interactive buffer switching. Ido is a superset of iswitchb (with | |
2578 a few exceptions), so don't enable both packages. | |
2579 | 2522 |
2580 --- | 2523 --- |
2581 ** CUA mode is now part of the Emacs distribution. | 2524 ** CUA mode is now part of the Emacs distribution. |
2582 | 2525 |
2583 The new cua package provides CUA-like keybindings using C-x for | 2526 The new cua package provides CUA-like keybindings using C-x for |
2619 | 2562 |
2620 Note: This version of cua mode is not backwards compatible with older | 2563 Note: This version of cua mode is not backwards compatible with older |
2621 versions of cua.el and cua-mode.el. To ensure proper operation, you | 2564 versions of cua.el and cua-mode.el. To ensure proper operation, you |
2622 must remove older versions of cua.el or cua-mode.el as well as the | 2565 must remove older versions of cua.el or cua-mode.el as well as the |
2623 loading and customization of those packages from the .emacs file. | 2566 loading and customization of those packages from the .emacs file. |
2567 | |
2568 +++ | |
2569 ** The new package dns-mode.el add syntax highlight of DNS master files. | |
2570 The key binding C-c C-s (`dns-mode-soa-increment-serial') can be used | |
2571 to increment the SOA serial. | |
2572 | |
2573 --- | |
2574 ** The new global minor mode `file-name-shadow-mode' modifies the way | |
2575 filenames being entered by the user in the minibuffer are displayed, so | |
2576 that it's clear when part of the entered filename will be ignored due to | |
2577 emacs' filename parsing rules. The ignored portion can be made dim, | |
2578 invisible, or otherwise less visually noticable. The display method may | |
2579 be displayed by customizing the variable `file-name-shadow-properties'. | |
2580 | |
2581 +++ | |
2582 ** The new package flymake.el does on-the-fly syntax checking of program | |
2583 source files. See the Flymake's Info manual for more details. | |
2584 | |
2585 --- | |
2586 ** The new Lisp library fringe.el controls the appearance of fringes. | |
2587 | |
2588 --- | |
2589 ** GDB-Script-mode is used for files like .gdbinit. | |
2590 | |
2591 +++ | |
2592 ** The new package gdb-ui.el provides an enhanced graphical interface to | |
2593 GDB. You can interact with GDB through the GUD buffer in the usual way, but | |
2594 there are also further buffers which control the execution and describe the | |
2595 state of your program. It separates the input/output of your program from | |
2596 that of GDB and watches expressions in the speedbar. It also uses features of | |
2597 Emacs 21 such as the display margin for breakpoints, and the toolbar. | |
2598 | |
2599 Use M-x gdba to start GDB-UI. | |
2600 | |
2601 --- | |
2602 ** The new package ibuffer provides a powerful, completely | |
2603 customizable replacement for buff-menu.el. | |
2604 | |
2605 --- | |
2606 ** Ido mode is now part of the Emacs distribution. | |
2607 | |
2608 The ido (interactively do) package is an extension of the iswitchb | |
2609 package to do interactive opening of files and directories in addition | |
2610 to interactive buffer switching. Ido is a superset of iswitchb (with | |
2611 a few exceptions), so don't enable both packages. | |
2612 | |
2613 +++ | |
2614 ** Image files are normally visited in Image mode, which lets you toggle | |
2615 between viewing the image and viewing the text using C-c C-c. | |
2624 | 2616 |
2625 +++ | 2617 +++ |
2626 ** The new keypad setup package provides several common bindings for | 2618 ** The new keypad setup package provides several common bindings for |
2627 the numeric keypad which is available on most keyboards. The numeric | 2619 the numeric keypad which is available on most keyboards. The numeric |
2628 keypad typically has the digits 0 to 9, a decimal point, keys marked | 2620 keypad typically has the digits 0 to 9, a decimal point, keys marked |
2679 | 2671 |
2680 Keyboard macros can now be debugged and edited interactively. | 2672 Keyboard macros can now be debugged and edited interactively. |
2681 C-x C-k SPC steps through the last keyboard macro one key sequence | 2673 C-x C-k SPC steps through the last keyboard macro one key sequence |
2682 at a time, prompting for the actions to take. | 2674 at a time, prompting for the actions to take. |
2683 | 2675 |
2676 +++ | |
2677 ** The new package longlines.el provides a minor mode for editing text | |
2678 files composed of long lines, based on the `use-hard-newlines' | |
2679 mechanism. The long lines are broken up by inserting soft newlines, | |
2680 which are automatically removed when saving the file to disk or | |
2681 copying into the kill ring, clipboard, etc. By default, Longlines | |
2682 mode inserts soft newlines automatically during editing, a behavior | |
2683 referred to as "soft word wrap" in other text editors. This is | |
2684 similar to Refill mode, but more reliable. To turn the word wrap | |
2685 feature off, set `longlines-auto-wrap' to nil. | |
2686 | |
2684 --- | 2687 --- |
2685 ** The old Octave mode bindings C-c f and C-c i have been changed | 2688 ** The old Octave mode bindings C-c f and C-c i have been changed |
2686 to C-c C-f and C-c C-i. The C-c C-i subcommands now have duplicate | 2689 to C-c C-f and C-c C-i. The C-c C-i subcommands now have duplicate |
2687 bindings on control characters--thus, C-c C-i C-b is the same as | 2690 bindings on control characters--thus, C-c C-i C-b is the same as |
2688 C-c C-i b, and so on. | 2691 C-c C-i b, and so on. |
2695 ghostview, use ghostscript to print (if you don't have a PostScript | 2698 ghostview, use ghostscript to print (if you don't have a PostScript |
2696 printer) or send directly to printer a PostScript code generated by | 2699 printer) or send directly to printer a PostScript code generated by |
2697 `ps-print' package. Use M-x pr-help for more information. | 2700 `ps-print' package. Use M-x pr-help for more information. |
2698 | 2701 |
2699 +++ | 2702 +++ |
2700 ** Calc is now part of the Emacs distribution. | 2703 ** The new python.el package is used to edit Python and Jython programs. |
2701 | 2704 |
2702 Calc is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written in | 2705 --- |
2703 Emacs Lisp. Its documentation is in a separate manual; within Emacs, | 2706 ** The minor mode Reveal mode makes text visible on the fly as you |
2704 type "C-h i m calc RET" to read that manual. A reference card is | 2707 move your cursor into hidden regions of the buffer. |
2705 available in `etc/calccard.tex' and `etc/calccard.ps'. | 2708 It should work with any package that uses overlays to hide parts |
2709 of a buffer, such as outline-minor-mode, hs-minor-mode, hide-ifdef-mode, ... | |
2710 | |
2711 There is also Global Reveal mode which affects all buffers. | |
2712 | |
2713 --- | |
2714 ** The ruler-mode.el library provides a minor mode for displaying an | |
2715 "active" ruler in the header line. You can use the mouse to visually | |
2716 change the `fill-column', `window-margins' and `tab-stop-list' | |
2717 settings. | |
2718 | |
2719 +++ | |
2720 ** SES mode (ses-mode) is a new major mode for creating and editing | |
2721 spreadsheet files. Besides the usual Emacs features (intuitive command | |
2722 letters, undo, cell formulas in Lisp, plaintext files, etc.) it also offers | |
2723 viral immunity and import/export of tab-separated values. | |
2724 | |
2725 +++ | |
2726 ** The new global minor mode `size-indication-mode' (off by default) | |
2727 shows the size of accessible part of the buffer on the mode line. | |
2728 | |
2729 +++ | |
2730 ** The new package table.el implements editable, WYSIWYG, embedded | |
2731 `text tables' in Emacs buffers. It simulates the effect of putting | |
2732 these tables in a special major mode. The package emulates WYSIWYG | |
2733 table editing available in modern word processors. The package also | |
2734 can generate a table source in typesetting and markup languages such | |
2735 as latex and html from the visually laid out text table. | |
2736 | |
2737 +++ | |
2738 ** The thumbs.el package allows you to preview image files as thumbnails | |
2739 and can be invoked from a Dired buffer. | |
2706 | 2740 |
2707 +++ | 2741 +++ |
2708 ** Tramp is now part of the distribution. | 2742 ** Tramp is now part of the distribution. |
2709 | 2743 |
2710 This package is similar to Ange-FTP: it allows you to edit remote | 2744 This package is similar to Ange-FTP: it allows you to edit remote |
2723 If you want to disable Tramp you should set | 2757 If you want to disable Tramp you should set |
2724 | 2758 |
2725 (setq tramp-default-method "ftp") | 2759 (setq tramp-default-method "ftp") |
2726 | 2760 |
2727 --- | 2761 --- |
2728 ** The new global minor mode `file-name-shadow-mode' modifies the way | 2762 ** The library tree-widget.el provides a new widget to display a set |
2729 filenames being entered by the user in the minibuffer are displayed, so | 2763 of hierarchical data as an outline. For example, the tree-widget is |
2730 that it's clear when part of the entered filename will be ignored due to | 2764 well suited to display a hierarchy of directories and files. |
2731 emacs' filename parsing rules. The ignored portion can be made dim, | 2765 |
2732 invisible, or otherwise less visually noticable. The display method may | 2766 --- |
2733 be displayed by customizing the variable `file-name-shadow-properties'. | 2767 ** The URL package (which had been part of W3) is now part of Emacs. |
2734 | 2768 |
2735 --- | 2769 --- |
2736 ** The ruler-mode.el library provides a minor mode for displaying an | 2770 ** New minor mode, Visible mode, toggles invisibility in the current buffer. |
2737 "active" ruler in the header line. You can use the mouse to visually | 2771 When enabled, it makes all invisible text visible. When disabled, it |
2738 change the `fill-column', `window-margins' and `tab-stop-list' | 2772 restores the previous value of `buffer-invisibility-spec'. |
2739 settings. | 2773 |
2740 | 2774 +++ |
2741 --- | 2775 ** The wdired.el package allows you to use normal editing commands on Dired |
2742 ** The minor mode Reveal mode makes text visible on the fly as you | 2776 buffers to change filenames, permissions, etc... |
2743 move your cursor into hidden regions of the buffer. | 2777 |
2744 It should work with any package that uses overlays to hide parts | |
2745 of a buffer, such as outline-minor-mode, hs-minor-mode, hide-ifdef-mode, ... | |
2746 | |
2747 There is also Global Reveal mode which affects all buffers. | |
2748 | |
2749 --- | |
2750 ** The new package ibuffer provides a powerful, completely | |
2751 customizable replacement for buff-menu.el. | |
2752 | |
2753 +++ | |
2754 ** The new package table.el implements editable, WYSIWYG, embedded | |
2755 `text tables' in Emacs buffers. It simulates the effect of putting | |
2756 these tables in a special major mode. The package emulates WYSIWYG | |
2757 table editing available in modern word processors. The package also | |
2758 can generate a table source in typesetting and markup languages such | |
2759 as latex and html from the visually laid out text table. | |
2760 | |
2761 +++ | |
2762 ** SES mode (ses-mode) is a new major mode for creating and editing | |
2763 spreadsheet files. Besides the usual Emacs features (intuitive command | |
2764 letters, undo, cell formulas in Lisp, plaintext files, etc.) it also offers | |
2765 viral immunity and import/export of tab-separated values. | |
2766 | |
2767 --- | |
2768 ** Support for `magic cookie' standout modes has been removed. | |
2769 Emacs will still work on terminals that require magic cookies in order | |
2770 to use standout mode, however they will not be able to display | |
2771 mode-lines in inverse-video. | |
2772 | |
2773 --- | |
2774 ** cplus-md.el has been removed to avoid problems with Custom. | |
2775 | |
2776 +++ | |
2777 ** New package benchmark.el contains simple support for convenient | |
2778 timing measurements of code (including the garbage collection component). | |
2779 | |
2780 --- | |
2781 ** The new Lisp library fringe.el controls the appearance of fringes. | |
2782 | |
2783 --- | |
2784 ** `cfengine-mode' is a major mode for editing GNU Cfengine | |
2785 configuration files. | |
2786 | 2778 |
2787 * Incompatible Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1 | 2779 * Incompatible Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1 |
2788 | 2780 |
2789 +++ | 2781 +++ |
2790 ** The new interactive-specification `G' reads a file name | 2782 ** The new interactive-specification `G' reads a file name |
2802 :propertize and :eval forms in the value of a variable whose | 2794 :propertize and :eval forms in the value of a variable whose |
2803 `risky-local-variable' property is nil. | 2795 `risky-local-variable' property is nil. |
2804 | 2796 |
2805 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1 | 2797 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1 |
2806 | 2798 |
2807 ** New functions, macros, and commands | 2799 +++ |
2808 | 2800 ** The option --script FILE runs Emacs in batch mode and loads FILE. |
2809 +++ | 2801 It is useful for writing Emacs Lisp shell script files, because they |
2810 *** The new function `filter-buffer-substring' extracts a buffer | 2802 can start with this line: |
2811 substring, passes it through a set of filter functions, and returns | 2803 |
2812 the filtered substring. It is used instead of `buffer-substring' or | 2804 #!/usr/bin/emacs --script |
2813 `delete-and-extract-region' when copying text into a user-accessible | 2805 |
2814 data structure, like the kill-ring, X clipboard, or a register. The | 2806 +++ |
2815 list of filter function is specified by the new variable | 2807 ** The option --directory DIR now modifies `load-path' immediately. |
2816 `buffer-substring-filters'. For example, Longlines mode uses | 2808 Directories are added to the front of `load-path' in the order they |
2817 `buffer-substring-filters' to remove soft newlines from the copied | 2809 appear on the command line. For example, with this command line: |
2818 text. | 2810 |
2819 | 2811 emacs -batch -L .. -L /tmp --eval "(require 'foo)" |
2820 +++ | 2812 |
2821 *** (while-no-input BODY...) runs BODY, but only so long as no input | 2813 Emacs looks for library `foo' in the parent directory, then in /tmp, then |
2822 arrives. If the user types or clicks anything, BODY stops as if a | 2814 in the other directories in `load-path'. (-L is short for --directory.) |
2823 quit had occurred. while-no-input returns the value of BODY, if BODY | 2815 |
2824 finishes. It returns nil if BODY was aborted. | 2816 +++ |
2825 | 2817 ** The default value of `sentence-end' is now defined using the new |
2826 +++ | 2818 variable `sentence-end-without-space', which contains such characters |
2827 *** New function `looking-back' checks whether a regular expression matches | 2819 that end a sentence without following spaces. |
2828 the text before point. Specifying the LIMIT argument bounds how far | 2820 |
2829 back the match can start; this is a way to keep it from taking too long. | 2821 The function `sentence-end' should be used to obtain the value of the |
2830 | 2822 variable `sentence-end'. If the variable `sentence-end' is nil, then |
2831 +++ | 2823 this function returns the regexp constructed from the variables |
2832 *** New functions `make-progress-reporter', `progress-reporter-update', | 2824 `sentence-end-without-period', `sentence-end-double-space' and |
2833 `progress-reporter-force-update', `progress-reporter-done', and | 2825 `sentence-end-without-space'. |
2834 `dotimes-with-progress-reporter' provide a simple and efficient way for | 2826 |
2835 a command to present progress messages for the user. | 2827 +++ |
2836 | 2828 ** The argument to forward-word, backward-word, forward-to-indentation |
2837 +++ | 2829 and backward-to-indentation is now optional, and defaults to 1. |
2838 *** The new primitive `get-internal-run-time' returns the processor | |
2839 run time used by Emacs since start-up. | |
2840 | |
2841 +++ | |
2842 *** The new function `called-interactively-p' does what many people | |
2843 have mistakenly believed `interactive-p' did: it returns t if the | |
2844 calling function was called through `call-interactively'. This should | |
2845 only be used when you cannot add a new "interactive" argument to the | |
2846 command. | |
2847 | |
2848 +++ | |
2849 *** The new function `assoc-string' replaces `assoc-ignore-case' and | |
2850 `assoc-ignore-representation', which are still available, but have | |
2851 been declared obsolete. | |
2852 | |
2853 --- | |
2854 *** New function quail-find-key returns a list of keys to type in the | |
2855 current input method to input a character. | |
2856 | |
2857 +++ | |
2858 *** New functions posn-at-point and posn-at-x-y return | |
2859 click-event-style position information for a given visible buffer | |
2860 position or for a given window pixel coordinate. | |
2861 | |
2862 +++ | |
2863 *** The new primitive `set-file-times' sets a file's access and | |
2864 modification times. Magic file name handlers can handle this | |
2865 operation. | |
2866 | |
2867 +++ | |
2868 *** The new function syntax-after returns the syntax code | |
2869 of the character after a specified buffer position, taking account | |
2870 of text properties as well as the character code. | |
2871 | |
2872 +++ | |
2873 *** `syntax-class' extracts the class of a syntax code (as returned | |
2874 by syntax-after). | |
2875 | |
2876 +++ | |
2877 *** New function `line-number-at-pos' returns line number of current | |
2878 line in current buffer, or if optional buffer position is given, line | |
2879 number of corresponding line in current buffer. | |
2880 | |
2881 +++ | |
2882 *** New function `macroexpand-all' expands all macros in a form. | |
2883 It is similar to the Common-Lisp function of the same name. | |
2884 One difference is that it guarantees to return the original argument | |
2885 if no expansion is done, which may be tested using `eq'. | |
2886 | |
2887 +++ | |
2888 *** New macro with-local-quit temporarily sets inhibit-quit to nil for use | |
2889 around potentially blocking or long-running code in timers | |
2890 and post-command-hooks. | |
2891 | |
2892 +++ | |
2893 *** The new function `rassq-delete-all' deletes all elements from an | |
2894 alist whose cdr is `eq' to a specified value. | |
2895 | |
2896 +++ | |
2897 *** New macros define-obsolete-variable-alias to combine defvaralias and | |
2898 make-obsolete-variable and define-obsolete-function-alias to combine defalias | |
2899 and make-obsolete. | |
2900 | |
2901 +++ | |
2902 ** copy-file now takes an additional option arg MUSTBENEW. | |
2903 | |
2904 This argument works like the MUSTBENEW argument of write-file. | |
2905 | |
2906 --- | |
2907 ** easy-mmode-define-global-mode has been renamed to | |
2908 define-global-minor-mode. The old name remains as an alias. | |
2909 | |
2910 +++ | |
2911 ** An element of buffer-undo-list can now have the form (apply FUNNAME | |
2912 . ARGS), where FUNNAME is a symbol other than t or nil. That stands | |
2913 for a high-level change that should be undone by evaluating (apply | |
2914 FUNNAME ARGS). | |
2915 | |
2916 These entries can also have the form (apply DELTA BEG END FUNNAME . ARGS) | |
2917 which indicates that the change which took place was limited to the | |
2918 range BEG...END and increased the buffer size by DELTA. | |
2919 | |
2920 +++ | |
2921 ** The line-move, scroll-up, and scroll-down functions will now | |
2922 modify the window vscroll to scroll through display rows that are | |
2923 taller that the height of the window, for example in the presense of | |
2924 large images. To disable this feature, Lisp code may bind the new | |
2925 variable `auto-window-vscroll' to nil. | |
2926 | |
2927 +++ | |
2928 ** If a buffer sets buffer-save-without-query to non-nil, | |
2929 save-some-buffers will always save that buffer without asking | |
2930 (if it's modified). | |
2931 | |
2932 +++ | |
2933 ** The function symbol-file tells you which file defined | |
2934 a certain function or variable. | |
2935 | |
2936 +++ | |
2937 ** Lisp code can now test if a given buffer position is inside a | |
2938 clickable link with the new function `mouse-on-link-p'. This is the | |
2939 function used by the new `mouse-1-click-follows-link' functionality. | |
2940 | |
2941 +++ | |
2942 ** `set-auto-mode' now gives the interpreter magic line (if present) | |
2943 precedence over the file name. Likewise an <?xml or <!DOCTYPE declaration | |
2944 will give the buffer XML or SGML mode, based on the new var | |
2945 `magic-mode-alist'. | |
2946 | |
2947 --- | |
2948 ** To manipulate the File menu using easy-menu, you must specify the | |
2949 proper name "file". In previous Emacs versions, you had to specify | |
2950 "files", even though the menu item itself was changed to say "File" | |
2951 several versions ago. | |
2952 | |
2953 +++ | |
2954 ** read-from-minibuffer now accepts an additional argument KEEP-ALL | |
2955 saying to put all inputs in the history list, even empty ones. | |
2956 | |
2957 +++ | |
2958 ** The new variable search-spaces-regexp controls how to search | |
2959 for spaces in a regular expression. If it is non-nil, it should be a | |
2960 regular expression, and any series of spaces stands for that regular | |
2961 expression. If it is nil, spaces stand for themselves. | |
2962 | |
2963 Spaces inside of constructs such as [..] and *, +, ? are never | |
2964 replaced with search-spaces-regexp. | |
2965 | |
2966 --- | |
2967 ** list-buffers-noselect now takes an additional argument, BUFFER-LIST. | |
2968 If it is non-nil, it specifies which buffers to list. | |
2969 | |
2970 --- | |
2971 ** set-buffer-file-coding-system now takes an additional argument, | |
2972 NOMODIFY. If it is non-nil, it means don't mark the buffer modified. | |
2973 | |
2974 +++ | |
2975 ** An interactive specification may now use the code letter 'U' to get | |
2976 the up-event that was discarded in case the last key sequence read for a | |
2977 previous 'k' or 'K' argument was a down-event; otherwise nil is used. | |
2978 | |
2979 +++ | |
2980 ** Function `translate-region' accepts also a char-table as TABLE | |
2981 argument. | |
2982 | |
2983 +++ | |
2984 ** Major mode functions now run the new normal hook | |
2985 `after-change-major-mode-hook', at their very end, after the mode hooks. | |
2986 | |
2987 +++ | |
2988 ** `auto-save-file-format' has been renamed to | |
2989 `buffer-auto-save-file-format' and made into a permanent local. | |
2990 | |
2991 +++ | |
2992 ** Both the variable and the function `disabled-command-hook' have | |
2993 been renamed to `disabled-command-function'. The variable | |
2994 `disabled-command-hook' has been kept as an obsolete alias. | |
2995 | |
2996 +++ | |
2997 ** Function `compute-motion' now calculates the usable window | |
2998 width if the WIDTH argument is nil. If the TOPOS argument is nil, | |
2999 the usable window height and width is used. | |
3000 | |
3001 +++ | |
3002 ** `visited-file-modtime' and `calendar-time-from-absolute' now return | |
3003 a list of two integers, instead of a cons. | |
3004 | 2830 |
3005 +++ | 2831 +++ |
3006 ** If a command sets transient-mark-mode to `only', that | 2832 ** If a command sets transient-mark-mode to `only', that |
3007 enables Transient Mark mode for the following command only. | 2833 enables Transient Mark mode for the following command only. |
3008 During that following command, the value of transient-mark-mode | 2834 During that following command, the value of transient-mark-mode |
3009 is `identity'. If it is still `identity' at the end of the command, | 2835 is `identity'. If it is still `identity' at the end of the command, |
3010 it changes to nil. | 2836 it changes to nil. |
3011 | 2837 |
3012 +++ | 2838 +++ |
3013 ** Cleaner way to enter key sequences. | |
3014 | |
3015 You can enter a constant key sequence in a more natural format, the | |
3016 same one used for saving keyboard macros, using the macro `kbd'. For | |
3017 example, | |
3018 | |
3019 (kbd "C-x C-f") => "\^x\^f" | |
3020 | |
3021 +++ | |
3022 ** The sentinel is now called when a network process is deleted with | |
3023 delete-process. The status message passed to the sentinel for a | |
3024 deleted network process is "deleted". The message passed to the | |
3025 sentinel when the connection is closed by the remote peer has been | |
3026 changed to "connection broken by remote peer". | |
3027 | |
3028 +++ | |
3029 ** If the buffer's undo list for the current command gets longer than | |
3030 undo-outer-limit, garbage collection empties it. This is to prevent | |
3031 it from using up the available memory and choking Emacs. | |
3032 | |
3033 +++ | |
3034 ** skip-chars-forward and skip-chars-backward now handle | |
3035 character classes such as [:alpha:], along with individual characters | |
3036 and ranges. | |
3037 | |
3038 +++ | |
3039 ** Function pos-visible-in-window-p now returns the pixel coordinates | |
3040 and partial visiblity state of the corresponding row, if the PARTIALLY | |
3041 arg is non-nil. | |
3042 | |
3043 +++ | |
3044 ** The function `eql' is now available without requiring the CL package. | |
3045 | |
3046 +++ | |
3047 ** The display space :width and :align-to text properties are now | |
3048 supported on text terminals. | |
3049 | |
3050 +++ | |
3051 ** Support for displaying image slices | |
3052 | |
3053 *** New display property (slice X Y WIDTH HEIGHT) may be used with | |
3054 an image property to display only a specific slice of the image. | |
3055 | |
3056 *** Function insert-image has new optional fourth arg to | |
3057 specify image slice (X Y WIDTH HEIGHT). | |
3058 | |
3059 *** New function insert-sliced-image inserts a given image as a | |
3060 specified number of evenly sized slices (rows x columns). | |
3061 | |
3062 +++ | |
3063 ** New line-height and line-spacing properties for newline characters | |
3064 | |
3065 A newline may now have line-height and line-spacing text or overlay | |
3066 properties that control the height of the corresponding display row. | |
3067 | |
3068 If the line-height property value is t, the newline does not | |
3069 contribute to the height of the display row; instead the height of the | |
3070 newline glyph is reduced. Also, a line-spacing property on this | |
3071 newline is ignored. This can be used to tile small images or image | |
3072 slices without adding blank areas between the images. | |
3073 | |
3074 If the line-height property value is a positive integer, the value | |
3075 specifies the minimum line height in pixels. If necessary, the line | |
3076 height it increased by increasing the line's ascent. | |
3077 | |
3078 If the line-height property value is a float, the minimum line height | |
3079 is calculated by multiplying the default frame line height by the | |
3080 given value. | |
3081 | |
3082 If the line-height property value is a cons (FACE . RATIO), the | |
3083 minimum line height is calculated as RATIO * height of named FACE. | |
3084 RATIO is int or float. If FACE is t, it specifies the current face. | |
3085 | |
3086 If the line-height property value is a cons (nil . RATIO), the line | |
3087 height is calculated as RATIO * actual height of the line's contents. | |
3088 | |
3089 If the line-height value is a cons (HEIGHT . TOTAL), HEIGHT specifies | |
3090 the line height as described above, while TOTAL is any of the forms | |
3091 described above and specifies the total height of the line, causing a | |
3092 varying number of pixels to be inserted after the line to make it line | |
3093 exactly that many pixels high. | |
3094 | |
3095 If the line-spacing property value is an positive integer, the value | |
3096 is used as additional pixels to insert after the display line; this | |
3097 overrides the default frame line-spacing and any buffer local value of | |
3098 the line-spacing variable. | |
3099 | |
3100 If the line-spacing property may be a float or cons, the line spacing | |
3101 is calculated as specified above for the line-height property. | |
3102 | |
3103 +++ | |
3104 ** The buffer local line-spacing variable may now have a float value, | |
3105 which is used as a height relative to the default frame line height. | |
3106 | |
3107 +++ | |
3108 ** Enhancements to stretch display properties | |
3109 | |
3110 The display property stretch specification form `(space PROPS)', where | |
3111 PROPS is a property list now allows pixel based width and height | |
3112 specifications, as well as enhanced horizontal text alignment. | |
3113 | |
3114 The value of these properties can now be a (primitive) expression | |
3115 which is evaluated during redisplay. The following expressions | |
3116 are supported: | |
3117 | |
3118 EXPR ::= NUM | (NUM) | UNIT | ELEM | POS | IMAGE | FORM | |
3119 NUM ::= INTEGER | FLOAT | SYMBOL | |
3120 UNIT ::= in | mm | cm | width | height | |
3121 ELEM ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin | |
3122 | scroll-bar | text | |
3123 POS ::= left | center | right | |
3124 FORM ::= (NUM . EXPR) | (OP EXPR ...) | |
3125 OP ::= + | - | |
3126 | |
3127 The form `NUM' specifies a fractional width or height of the default | |
3128 frame font size. The form `(NUM)' specifies an absolute number of | |
3129 pixels. If a symbol is specified, its buffer-local variable binding | |
3130 is used. The `in', `mm', and `cm' units specifies the number of | |
3131 pixels per inch, milli-meter, and centi-meter, resp. The `width' and | |
3132 `height' units correspond to the width and height of the current face | |
3133 font. An image specification corresponds to the width or height of | |
3134 the image. | |
3135 | |
3136 The `left-fringe', `right-fringe', `left-margin', `right-margin', | |
3137 `scroll-bar', and `text' elements specify to the width of the | |
3138 corresponding area of the window. | |
3139 | |
3140 The `left', `center', and `right' positions can be used with :align-to | |
3141 to specify a position relative to the left edge, center, or right edge | |
3142 of the text area. One of the above window elements (except `text') | |
3143 can also be used with :align-to to specify that the position is | |
3144 relative to the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for | |
3145 a relative position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of | |
3146 these symbols), further occurences of these symbols are interpreted as | |
3147 the width of the area. | |
3148 | |
3149 For example, to align to the center of the left-margin, use | |
3150 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin)) | |
3151 | |
3152 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative | |
3153 to the left edge of the text area. For example, :align-to 0 in a | |
3154 header-line aligns with the first text column in the text area. | |
3155 | |
3156 The value of the form `(NUM . EXPR)' is the value of NUM multiplied by | |
3157 the value of the expression EXPR. For example, (2 . in) specifies a | |
3158 width of 2 inches, while (0.5 . IMAGE) specifies half the width (or | |
3159 height) of the specified image. | |
3160 | |
3161 The form `(+ EXPR ...)' adds up the value of the expressions. | |
3162 The form `(- EXPR ...)' negates or subtracts the value of the expressions. | |
3163 | |
3164 +++ | |
3165 ** Normally, the cursor is displayed at the end of any overlay and | |
3166 text property string that may be present at the current window | |
3167 position. The cursor may now be placed on any character of such | |
3168 strings by giving that character a non-nil `cursor' text property. | |
3169 | |
3170 +++ | |
3171 ** The first face specification element in a defface can specify | |
3172 `default' instead of frame classification. Then its attributes act as | |
3173 defaults that apply to all the subsequent cases (and may be overridden | |
3174 by them). | |
3175 | |
3176 +++ | |
3177 ** New face attribute `min-colors' can be used to tailor the face color | |
3178 to the number of colors supported by a display, and define the | |
3179 foreground and background colors accordingly so that they look best on | |
3180 a terminal that supports at least this many colors. This is now the | |
3181 preferred method for defining default faces in a way that makes a good | |
3182 use of the capabilities of the display. | |
3183 | |
3184 +++ | |
3185 ** Customizable fringe bitmaps | |
3186 | |
3187 *** New function 'define-fringe-bitmap' can now be used to create new | |
3188 fringe bitmaps, as well as change the built-in fringe bitmaps. | |
3189 | |
3190 To change a built-in bitmap, do (require 'fringe) and use the symbol | |
3191 identifing the bitmap such as `left-truncation or `continued-line'. | |
3192 | |
3193 *** New function 'destroy-fringe-bitmap' may be used to destroy a | |
3194 previously created bitmap, or restore a built-in bitmap. | |
3195 | |
3196 *** New function 'set-fringe-bitmap-face' can now be used to set a | |
3197 specific face to be used for a specific fringe bitmap. The face is | |
3198 automatically merged with the `fringe' face, so normally, the face | |
3199 should only specify the foreground color of the bitmap. | |
3200 | |
3201 *** There are new display properties, left-fringe and right-fringe, | |
3202 that can be used to show a specific bitmap in the left or right fringe | |
3203 bitmap of the display line. | |
3204 | |
3205 Format is 'display '(left-fringe BITMAP [FACE]), where BITMAP is a | |
3206 symbol identifying a fringe bitmap, either built-in or defined with | |
3207 `define-fringe-bitmap', and FACE is an optional face name to be used | |
3208 for displaying the bitmap instead of the default `fringe' face. | |
3209 When specified, FACE is automatically merged with the `fringe' face. | |
3210 | |
3211 *** New function `fringe-bitmaps-at-pos' returns the current fringe | |
3212 bitmaps in the display line at a given buffer position. | |
3213 | |
3214 +++ | |
3215 ** Multiple overlay arrows can now be defined and managed via the new | |
3216 variable `overlay-arrow-variable-list'. It contains a list of | |
3217 varibles which contain overlay arrow position markers, including | |
3218 the original `overlay-arrow-position' variable. | |
3219 | |
3220 Each variable on this list may have individual `overlay-arrow-string' | |
3221 and `overlay-arrow-bitmap' properties that specify an overlay arrow | |
3222 string (for non-window terminals) or fringe bitmap (for window | |
3223 systems) to display at the corresponding overlay arrow position. | |
3224 If either property is not set, the default `overlay-arrow-string' or | |
3225 'overlay-arrow-fringe-bitmap' will be used. | |
3226 | |
3227 +++ | |
3228 ** The default value of `sentence-end' is now defined using the new | |
3229 variable `sentence-end-without-space' which contains such characters | |
3230 that end a sentence without following spaces. | |
3231 | |
3232 +++ | |
3233 ** The function `sentence-end' should be used to obtain the value of | |
3234 the variable `sentence-end'. If the variable `sentence-end' is nil, | |
3235 then this function returns the regexp constructed from the variables | |
3236 `sentence-end-without-period', `sentence-end-double-space' and | |
3237 `sentence-end-without-space'. | |
3238 | |
3239 +++ | |
3240 ** The flags, width, and precision options for %-specifications in function | |
3241 `format' are now documented. Some flags that were accepted but not | |
3242 implemented (such as "*") are no longer accepted. | |
3243 | |
3244 +++ | |
3245 ** New function `delete-dups' destructively removes `equal' duplicates | |
3246 from a list. Of several `equal' occurrences of an element in the list, | |
3247 the first one is kept. | |
3248 | |
3249 +++ | |
3250 ** `declare' is now a macro. This change was made mostly for | |
3251 documentation purposes and should have no real effect on Lisp code. | |
3252 | |
3253 +++ | |
3254 ** A file name handler can declare which operations it handles. | |
3255 | |
3256 You do this by putting an `operation' property on the handler name | |
3257 symbol. The property value should be a list of the operations that | |
3258 the handler really handles. It won't be called for any other | |
3259 operations. | |
3260 | |
3261 This is useful for autoloaded handlers, to prevent them from being | |
3262 autoloaded when not really necessary. | |
3263 | |
3264 +++ | |
3265 ** The new hook `before-save-hook' is invoked by `basic-save-buffer' | 2839 ** The new hook `before-save-hook' is invoked by `basic-save-buffer' |
3266 before saving buffers. This allows packages to perform various final | 2840 before saving buffers. This allows packages to perform various final |
3267 tasks, for example; it can be used by the copyright package to make | 2841 tasks, for example; it can be used by the copyright package to make |
3268 sure saved files have the current year in any copyright headers. | 2842 sure saved files have the current year in any copyright headers. |
3269 | 2843 |
3270 +++ | 2844 +++ |
3271 ** The function `insert-for-yank' now supports strings where the | 2845 ** If a buffer sets buffer-save-without-query to non-nil, |
3272 `yank-handler' property does not span the first character of the | 2846 save-some-buffers will always save that buffer without asking |
3273 string. The old behavior is available if you call | 2847 (if it's modified). |
3274 `insert-for-yank-1' instead. | 2848 |
3275 | 2849 --- |
3276 +++ | 2850 ** list-buffers-noselect now takes an additional argument, BUFFER-LIST. |
3277 ** New function `get-char-property-and-overlay' accepts the same | 2851 If it is non-nil, it specifies which buffers to list. |
3278 arguments as `get-char-property' and returns a cons whose car is the | |
3279 return value of `get-char-property' called with those arguments and | |
3280 whose cdr is the overlay in which the property was found, or nil if | |
3281 it was found as a text property or not found at all. | |
3282 | |
3283 +++ (lispref) | |
3284 ??? (man) | |
3285 ** The mouse pointer shape in void text areas (i.e. after the end of a | |
3286 line or below the last line in the buffer) of the text window is now | |
3287 controlled by the new variable `void-text-area-pointer'. The default | |
3288 is to use the `arrow' (non-text) pointer. Other choices are `text' | |
3289 (or nil), `hand', `vdrag', `hdrag', `modeline', and `hourglass'. | |
3290 | |
3291 +++ | |
3292 ** The mouse pointer shape over an image can now be controlled by the | |
3293 :pointer image property. | |
3294 | |
3295 +++ | |
3296 ** The mouse pointer shape over ordinary text or images may now be | |
3297 controlled/overriden via the `pointer' text property. | |
3298 | |
3299 +++ | |
3300 ** Images may now have an associated image map via the :map property. | |
3301 | |
3302 An image map is an alist where each element has the format (AREA ID PLIST). | |
3303 An AREA is specified as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon: | |
3304 A rectangle is a cons (rect . ((x0 . y0) . (x1 . y1))) specifying the | |
3305 pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right corners. | |
3306 A circle is a cons (circle . ((x0 . y0) . r)) specifying the center | |
3307 and the radius of the circle; r may be a float or integer. | |
3308 A polygon is a cons (poly . [x0 y0 x1 y1 ...]) where each pair in the | |
3309 vector describes one corner in the polygon. | |
3310 | |
3311 When the mouse pointer is above a hot-spot area of an image, the | |
3312 PLIST of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a `help-echo' | |
3313 property it defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains | |
3314 a `pointer' property, it defines the shape of the mouse cursor when | |
3315 it is over the hot-spot. See the variable 'void-area-text-pointer' | |
3316 for possible pointer shapes. | |
3317 | |
3318 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot, | |
3319 an event is composed by combining the ID of the hot-spot with the | |
3320 mouse event, e.g. [area4 mouse-1] if the hot-spot's ID is `area4'. | |
3321 | |
3322 ** Mouse event enhancements: | |
3323 | |
3324 +++ | |
3325 *** Mouse clicks on fringes now generates left-fringe or right-fringes | |
3326 events, rather than a text area click event. | |
3327 | |
3328 +++ | |
3329 *** Mouse clicks in the left and right marginal areas now includes a | |
3330 sensible buffer position corresponding to the first character in the | |
3331 corresponding text row. | |
3332 | |
3333 +++ | |
3334 *** Function `mouse-set-point' now works for events outside text area. | |
3335 | |
3336 +++ | |
3337 *** Mouse events now includes buffer position for all event types. | |
3338 | |
3339 +++ | |
3340 *** `posn-point' now returns buffer position for non-text area events. | |
3341 | |
3342 +++ | |
3343 *** New function `posn-area' returns window area clicked on (nil means | |
3344 text area). | |
3345 | |
3346 +++ | |
3347 *** Mouse events include actual glyph column and row for all event types. | |
3348 | |
3349 +++ | |
3350 *** New function `posn-actual-col-row' returns actual glyph coordinates. | |
3351 | |
3352 +++ | |
3353 *** Mouse events may now include image object in addition to string object. | |
3354 | |
3355 +++ | |
3356 *** Mouse events include relative x and y pixel coordinates relative to | |
3357 the top left corner of the object (image or character) clicked on. | |
3358 | |
3359 +++ | |
3360 *** Mouse events include the pixel width and height of the object | |
3361 (image or character) clicked on. | |
3362 | |
3363 +++ | |
3364 *** New functions 'posn-object', 'posn-object-x-y', and | |
3365 'posn-object-width-height' return the image or string object of a mouse | |
3366 click, the x and y pixel coordinates relative to the top left corner | |
3367 of that object, and the total width and height of that object. | |
3368 | |
3369 +++ | |
3370 ** New function `force-window-update' can initiate a full redisplay of | |
3371 one or all windows. Normally, this is not needed as changes in window | |
3372 contents are detected automatically. However, certain implicit | |
3373 changes to mode lines, header lines, or display properties may require | |
3374 forcing an explicit window update. | |
3375 | |
3376 --- | |
3377 ** New function `redirect-debugging-output' can be used to redirect | |
3378 debugging output on the stderr file handle to a file. | |
3379 | |
3380 +++ | |
3381 ** `split-string' now includes null substrings in the returned list if | |
3382 the optional argument SEPARATORS is non-nil and there are matches for | |
3383 SEPARATORS at the beginning or end of the string. If SEPARATORS is | |
3384 nil, or if the new optional third argument OMIT-NULLS is non-nil, all | |
3385 empty matches are omitted from the returned list. | |
3386 | |
3387 +++ | |
3388 ** `makehash' is now obsolete. Use `make-hash-table' instead. | |
3389 | |
3390 +++ | |
3391 ** If optional third argument APPEND to `add-to-list' is non-nil, a | |
3392 new element gets added at the end of the list instead of at the | |
3393 beginning. This change actually occurred in Emacs-21.1, but was not | |
3394 documented. | |
3395 | |
3396 +++ | |
3397 ** Major modes can define `eldoc-documentation-function' | |
3398 locally to provide Eldoc functionality by some method appropriate to | |
3399 the language. | |
3400 | |
3401 --- | |
3402 ** New coding system property `mime-text-unsuitable' indicates that | |
3403 the coding system's `mime-charset' is not suitable for MIME text | |
3404 parts, e.g. utf-16. | |
3405 | |
3406 +++ | |
3407 ** The argument to forward-word, backward-word, forward-to-indentation | |
3408 and backward-to-indentation is now optional, and defaults to 1. | |
3409 | |
3410 +++ | |
3411 ** (char-displayable-p CHAR) returns non-nil if Emacs ought to be able | |
3412 to display CHAR. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has | |
3413 a font to display the character set that CHAR belongs to. | |
3414 | |
3415 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset | |
3416 does that, this value may not be accurate. | |
3417 | |
3418 +++ | |
3419 ** The new function `window-inside-edges' returns the edges of the | |
3420 actual text portion of the window, not including the scroll bar or | |
3421 divider line, the fringes, the display margins, the header line and | |
3422 the mode line. | |
3423 | |
3424 +++ | |
3425 ** The new functions `window-pixel-edges' and `window-inside-pixel-edges' | |
3426 return window edges in units of pixels, rather than columns and lines. | |
3427 | 2852 |
3428 +++ | 2853 +++ |
3429 ** The kill-buffer-hook is now permanent-local. | 2854 ** The kill-buffer-hook is now permanent-local. |
3430 | 2855 |
3431 +++ | 2856 +++ |
3432 ** `select-window' takes an optional second argument `norecord', like | 2857 ** `auto-save-file-format' has been renamed to |
3433 `switch-to-buffer'. | 2858 `buffer-auto-save-file-format' and made into a permanent local. |
3434 | 2859 |
3435 +++ | 2860 +++ |
3436 ** The new macro `with-selected-window' temporarily switches the | 2861 ** Functions `file-name-sans-extension' and `file-name-extension' now |
3437 selected window without impacting the order of buffer-list. | 2862 ignore the leading dots in file names, so that file names such as |
3438 | 2863 `.emacs' are treated as extensionless. |
3439 +++ | 2864 |
3440 ** The `keymap' property now also works at the ends of overlays and | 2865 +++ |
3441 text-properties, according to their stickiness. This also means that it | 2866 ** copy-file now takes an additional option arg MUSTBENEW. |
3442 works with empty overlays. The same hold for the `local-map' property. | 2867 |
3443 | 2868 This argument works like the MUSTBENEW argument of write-file. |
3444 +++ | 2869 |
3445 ** (map-keymap FUNCTION KEYMAP) applies the function to each binding | 2870 +++ |
3446 in the keymap. | 2871 ** If the second argument to `copy-file' is the name of a directory, |
3447 | 2872 the file is copied to that directory instead of signaling an error. |
3448 --- | 2873 |
3449 ** VC changes for backends: | 2874 +++ |
3450 *** (vc-switches BACKEND OPERATION) is a new function for use by backends. | 2875 ** `visited-file-modtime' and `calendar-time-from-absolute' now return |
3451 *** The new `find-version' backend function replaces the `destfile' | 2876 a list of two integers, instead of a cons. |
3452 parameter of the `checkout' backend function. | |
3453 Old code still works thanks to a default `find-version' behavior that | |
3454 uses the old `destfile' parameter. | |
3455 | |
3456 +++ | |
3457 ** The new macro dynamic-completion-table supports using functions | |
3458 as a dynamic completion table. | |
3459 | |
3460 (dynamic-completion-table FUN) | |
3461 | |
3462 FUN is called with one argument, the string for which completion is required, | |
3463 and it should return an alist containing all the intended possible | |
3464 completions. This alist may be a full list of possible completions so that FUN | |
3465 can ignore the value of its argument. If completion is performed in the | |
3466 minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer from which the minibuffer was | |
3467 entered. dynamic-completion-table then computes the completion. | |
3468 | |
3469 +++ | |
3470 ** The new macro lazy-completion-table initializes a variable | |
3471 as a lazy completion table. | |
3472 | |
3473 (lazy-completion-table VAR FUN &rest ARGS) | |
3474 | |
3475 If the completion table VAR is used for the first time (e.g., by passing VAR | |
3476 as an argument to `try-completion'), the function FUN is called with arguments | |
3477 ARGS. FUN must return the completion table that will be stored in VAR. If | |
3478 completion is requested in the minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer | |
3479 from which the minibuffer was entered. The return value of | |
3480 `lazy-completion-table' must be used to initialize the value of VAR. | |
3481 | |
3482 +++ | |
3483 ** `minor-mode-list' now holds a list of minor mode commands. | |
3484 | |
3485 +++ | |
3486 ** The new function `modify-all-frames-parameters' modifies parameters | |
3487 for all (existing and future) frames. | |
3488 | |
3489 +++ | |
3490 ** `sit-for' can now be called with args (SECONDS &optional NODISP). | |
3491 | |
3492 +++ | |
3493 ** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-preprocessor-face'. | |
3494 | |
3495 +++ | |
3496 ** The macro `with-syntax-table' does not copy the table any more. | |
3497 | |
3498 +++ | |
3499 ** The variable `face-font-rescale-alist' specifies how much larger | |
3500 (or smaller) font we should use. For instance, if the value is | |
3501 '((SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN . 1.3)) and a face requests a font of 10 | |
3502 point, we actually use a font of 13 point if the font matches | |
3503 SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN. | |
3504 | |
3505 +++ | |
3506 ** The function `number-sequence' returns a list of equally-separated | |
3507 numbers. For instance, (number-sequence 4 9) returns (4 5 6 7 8 9). | |
3508 By default, the separation is 1, but you can specify a different separation | |
3509 as the third argument. (number-sequence 1.5 6 2) returns (1.5 3.5 5.5). | |
3510 | 2877 |
3511 +++ | 2878 +++ |
3512 ** `file-chase-links' now takes an optional second argument LIMIT which | 2879 ** `file-chase-links' now takes an optional second argument LIMIT which |
3513 specifies the maximum number of links to chase through. If after that | 2880 specifies the maximum number of links to chase through. If after that |
3514 many iterations the file name obtained is still a symbolic link, | 2881 many iterations the file name obtained is still a symbolic link, |
3515 `file-chase-links' returns it anyway. | 2882 `file-chase-links' returns it anyway. |
3516 | 2883 |
3517 --- | 2884 +++ |
3518 ** `set-fontset-font', `fontset-info', `fontset-font' now operate on | 2885 ** The function `commandp' takes an additional optional |
3519 the default fontset if the argument NAME is nil.. | 2886 argument. If it is non-nil, then `commandp' checks |
3520 | 2887 for a function that could be called with `call-interactively', |
3521 +++ | 2888 and does not return t for keyboard macros. |
3522 ** The escape sequence \s is now interpreted as a SPACE character, | 2889 |
3523 unless it is followed by a `-' in a character constant (e.g. ?\s-A), | 2890 +++ |
3524 in which case it is still interpreted as the super modifier. | 2891 ** An interactive specification may now use the code letter 'U' to get |
3525 In strings, \s is always interpreted as a space. | 2892 the up-event that was discarded in case the last key sequence read for a |
3526 | 2893 previous 'k' or 'K' argument was a down-event; otherwise nil is used. |
3527 +++ | 2894 |
3528 ** New function `set-process-filter-multibyte' sets the multibyteness | 2895 --- |
3529 of a string given to a process's filter. | 2896 ** Functions y-or-n-p, read-char, read-key-sequence and the like, that |
3530 | 2897 display a prompt but don't use the minibuffer, now display the prompt |
3531 +++ | 2898 using the text properties (esp. the face) of the prompt string. |
3532 ** New function `process-filter-multibyte-p' returns t if | 2899 |
3533 a string given to a process's filter is multibyte. | 2900 +++ |
3534 | 2901 ** read-from-minibuffer now accepts an additional argument KEEP-ALL |
3535 +++ | 2902 saying to put all inputs in the history list, even empty ones. |
3536 ** A filter function of a process is called with a multibyte string if | |
3537 the filter's multibyteness is t. That multibyteness is decided by the | |
3538 value of `default-enable-multibyte-characters' when the process is | |
3539 created and can be changed later by `set-process-filter-multibyte'. | |
3540 | |
3541 +++ | |
3542 ** If a process's coding system is raw-text or no-conversion and its | |
3543 buffer is multibyte, the output of the process is at first converted | |
3544 to multibyte by `string-to-multibyte' then inserted in the buffer. | |
3545 Previously, it was converted to multibyte by `string-as-multibyte', | |
3546 which was not compatible with the behavior of file reading. | |
3547 | |
3548 +++ | |
3549 ** New function `string-to-multibyte' converts a unibyte string to a | |
3550 multibyte string with the same individual character codes. | |
3551 | |
3552 +++ | |
3553 ** New variables `gc-elapsed' and `gcs-done' provide extra information | |
3554 on garbage collection. | |
3555 | |
3556 +++ | |
3557 ** New function `decode-coding-inserted-region' decodes a region as if | |
3558 it is read from a file without decoding. | |
3559 | |
3560 +++ | |
3561 ** New function `locale-info' accesses locale information. | |
3562 | |
3563 +++ | |
3564 ** `save-selected-window' now saves and restores the selected window | |
3565 of every frame. This way, it restores everything that can be changed | |
3566 by calling `select-window'. | |
3567 | |
3568 --- | |
3569 ** `easy-menu-define' now allows you to use nil for the symbol name | |
3570 if you don't need to give the menu a name. If you install the menu | |
3571 into other keymaps right away (MAPS is non-nil), it usually doesn't | |
3572 need to have a name. | |
3573 | |
3574 ** Byte compiler changes: | |
3575 | |
3576 --- | |
3577 *** `(featurep 'xemacs)' is treated by the compiler as nil. This | |
3578 helps to avoid noisy compiler warnings in code meant to run under both | |
3579 Emacs and XEmacs and may sometimes make the result significantly more | |
3580 efficient. Since byte code from recent versions of XEmacs won't | |
3581 generally run in Emacs and vice versa, this optimization doesn't lose | |
3582 you anything. | |
3583 | |
3584 +++ | |
3585 *** You can avoid warnings for possibly-undefined symbols with a | |
3586 simple convention that the compiler understands. (This is mostly | |
3587 useful in code meant to be portable to different Emacs versions.) | |
3588 Write forms like the following, or code that macroexpands into such | |
3589 forms: | |
3590 | |
3591 (if (fboundp 'foo) <then> <else>) | |
3592 (if (boundp 'foo) <then> <else) | |
3593 | |
3594 In the first case, using `foo' as a function inside the <then> form | |
3595 won't produce a warning if it's not defined as a function, and in the | |
3596 second case, using `foo' as a variable won't produce a warning if it's | |
3597 unbound. The test must be in exactly one of the above forms (after | |
3598 macro expansion), but such tests may be nested. Note that `when' and | |
3599 `unless' expand to `if', but `cond' doesn't. | |
3600 | |
3601 +++ | |
3602 *** The new macro `with-no-warnings' suppresses all compiler warnings | |
3603 inside its body. In terms of execution, it is equivalent to `progn'. | |
3604 | |
3605 +++ | |
3606 ** The new translation table `translation-table-for-input' | |
3607 is used for customizing self-insertion. The character to | |
3608 be inserted is translated through it. | |
3609 | |
3610 +++ | |
3611 ** `load-history' can now have elements of the form (t . FUNNAME), | |
3612 which means FUNNAME was previously defined as an autoload (before the | |
3613 current file redefined it). | |
3614 | |
3615 +++ | |
3616 ** `load-history' now records (defun . FUNNAME) when a function is | |
3617 defined. For a variable, it records just the variable name. | |
3618 | |
3619 +++ | |
3620 ** New Lisp library testcover.el works with edebug to help you determine | |
3621 whether you've tested all your Lisp code. Function testcover-start | |
3622 instruments all functions in a given file. Then test your code. Function | |
3623 testcover-mark-all adds overlay "splotches" to the Lisp file's buffer to | |
3624 show where coverage is lacking. Command testcover-next-mark (bind it to | |
3625 a key!) will move point forward to the next spot that has a splotch. | |
3626 | |
3627 *** Normally, a red splotch indicates the form was never completely evaluated; | |
3628 a brown splotch means it always evaluated to the same value. The red | |
3629 splotches are skipped for forms that can't possibly complete their evaluation, | |
3630 such as `error'. The brown splotches are skipped for forms that are expected | |
3631 to always evaluate to the same value, such as (setq x 14). | |
3632 | |
3633 *** For difficult cases, you can add do-nothing macros to your code to help | |
3634 out the test coverage tool. The macro `noreturn' suppresses a red splotch. | |
3635 It is an error if the argument to `noreturn' does return. The macro 1value | |
3636 suppresses a brown splotch for its argument. This macro is a no-op except | |
3637 during test-coverage -- then it signals an error if the argument actually | |
3638 returns differing values. | |
3639 | |
3640 +++ | |
3641 ** New function unsafep returns nil if the given Lisp form can't possibly | |
3642 do anything dangerous; otherwise it returns a reason why the form might be | |
3643 unsafe (calls dangerous function, alters global variable, etc). | |
3644 | |
3645 +++ | |
3646 ** The new variable `print-continuous-numbering', when non-nil, says | |
3647 that successive calls to print functions should use the same | |
3648 numberings for circular structure references. This is only relevant | |
3649 when `print-circle' is non-nil. | |
3650 | |
3651 When you bind `print-continuous-numbering' to t, you should | |
3652 also bind `print-number-table' to nil. | |
3653 | |
3654 +++ | |
3655 ** When using non-toolkit scroll bars with the default width, | |
3656 the scroll-bar-width frame parameter value is nil. | |
3657 | |
3658 +++ | |
3659 ** The new function copy-abbrev-table returns a new abbrev table that | |
3660 is a copy of a given abbrev table. | |
3661 | |
3662 +++ | |
3663 ** The option --script FILE runs Emacs in batch mode and loads FILE. | |
3664 It is useful for writing Emacs Lisp shell script files, because they | |
3665 can start with this line: | |
3666 | |
3667 #!/usr/bin/emacs --script | |
3668 | |
3669 +++ | |
3670 ** The option --directory DIR now modifies `load-path' immediately. | |
3671 Directories are added to the front of `load-path' in the order they | |
3672 appear on the command line. For example, with this command line: | |
3673 | |
3674 emacs -batch -L .. -L /tmp --eval "(require 'foo)" | |
3675 | |
3676 Emacs looks for library `foo' in the parent directory, then in /tmp, then | |
3677 in the other directories in `load-path'. (-L is short for --directory.) | |
3678 | |
3679 +++ | |
3680 ** A function's docstring can now hold the function's usage info on | |
3681 its last line. It should match the regexp "\n\n(fn.*)\\'". | |
3682 | |
3683 --- | |
3684 ** New CCL functions `lookup-character' and `lookup-integer' access | |
3685 hash tables defined by the Lisp function `define-translation-hash-table'. | |
3686 | |
3687 +++ | |
3688 ** The new function `minibufferp' returns non-nil if its optional buffer | |
3689 argument is a minibuffer. If the argument is omitted it defaults to | |
3690 the current buffer. | |
3691 | |
3692 +++ | |
3693 ** There is a new Warnings facility; see the functions `warn' | |
3694 and `display-warning'. | |
3695 | |
3696 +++ | |
3697 ** The functions all-completions and try-completion now accept lists | |
3698 of strings as well as hash-tables additionally to alists, obarrays | |
3699 and functions. Furthermore, the function `test-completion' is now | |
3700 exported to Lisp. The keys in alists and hash tables may be either | |
3701 strings or symbols, which are automatically converted with to strings. | |
3702 | |
3703 --- | |
3704 ** When pure storage overflows while dumping, Emacs now prints how | |
3705 much pure storage it will approximately need. | |
3706 | |
3707 +++ | |
3708 ** The new variable `auto-coding-functions' lets you specify functions | |
3709 to examine a file being visited and deduce the proper coding system | |
3710 for it. (If the coding system is detected incorrectly for a specific | |
3711 file, you can put a `coding:' tags to override it.) | |
3712 | |
3713 --- | |
3714 ** The new function `merge-coding-systems' fills in unspecified aspects | |
3715 of one coding system from another coding system. | |
3716 | |
3717 +++ | |
3718 ** The variable `safe-local-eval-forms' specifies a list of forms that | |
3719 are ok to evaluate when they appear in an `eval' local variables | |
3720 specification. Normally Emacs asks for confirmation before evaluating | |
3721 such a form, but if the form appears in this list, no confirmation is | |
3722 needed. | |
3723 | |
3724 --- | |
3725 ** If a function has a non-nil `safe-local-eval-function' property, | |
3726 that means it is ok to evaluate some calls to that function when it | |
3727 appears in an `eval' local variables specification. If the property | |
3728 is t, then any form calling that function with constant arguments is | |
3729 ok. If the property is a function or list of functions, they are called | |
3730 with the form as argument, and if any returns t, the form is ok to call. | |
3731 | |
3732 If the form is not "ok to call", that means Emacs asks for | |
3733 confirmation as before. | |
3734 | |
3735 +++ | |
3736 ** Controlling the default left and right fringe widths. | |
3737 | |
3738 The default left and right fringe widths for all windows of a frame | |
3739 can now be controlled by setting the `left-fringe' and `right-fringe' | |
3740 frame parameters to an integer value specifying the width in pixels. | |
3741 Setting the width to 0 effectively removes the corresponding fringe. | |
3742 | |
3743 The actual default fringe widths for the frame may deviate from the | |
3744 specified widths, since the combined fringe widths must match an | |
3745 integral number of columns. The extra width is distributed evenly | |
3746 between the left and right fringe. For force a specific fringe width, | |
3747 specify the width as a negative integer (if both widths are negative, | |
3748 only the left fringe gets the specified width). | |
3749 | |
3750 Setting the width to nil (the default), restores the default fringe | |
3751 width which is the minimum number of pixels necessary to display any | |
3752 of the currently defined fringe bitmaps. The width of the built-in | |
3753 fringe bitmaps is 8 pixels. | |
3754 | |
3755 +++ | |
3756 ** Per-window fringes settings | |
3757 | |
3758 Windows can now have their own individual fringe widths and position | |
3759 settings. | |
3760 | |
3761 To control the fringe widths of a window, either set the buffer-local | |
3762 variables `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', or call | |
3763 `set-window-fringes'. | |
3764 | |
3765 To control the fringe position in a window, that is, whether fringes | |
3766 are positioned between the display margins and the window's text area, | |
3767 or at the edges of the window, either set the buffer-local variable | |
3768 `fringes-outside-margins' or call `set-window-fringes'. | |
3769 | |
3770 The function `window-fringes' can be used to obtain the current | |
3771 settings. To make `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', and | |
3772 `fringes-outside-margins' take effect, you must set them before | |
3773 displaying the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force | |
3774 an update of the display margins. | |
3775 | |
3776 +++ | |
3777 ** Per-window vertical scroll-bar settings | |
3778 | |
3779 Windows can now have their own individual scroll-bar settings | |
3780 controlling the width and position of scroll-bars. | |
3781 | |
3782 To control the scroll-bar of a window, either set the buffer-local | |
3783 variables `scroll-bar-mode' and `scroll-bar-width', or call | |
3784 `set-window-scroll-bars'. The function `window-scroll-bars' can be | |
3785 used to obtain the current settings. To make `scroll-bar-mode' and | |
3786 `scroll-bar-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
3787 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
3788 of the display margins. | |
3789 | |
3790 +++ | |
3791 ** The function `set-window-buffer' now has an optional third argument | |
3792 KEEP-MARGINS which will preserve the window's current margin, fringe, | |
3793 and scroll-bar settings if non-nil. | |
3794 | |
3795 +++ | |
3796 ** Renamed hooks to better follow the naming convention: | |
3797 find-file-hooks to find-file-hook, | |
3798 find-file-not-found-hooks to find-file-not-found-functions, | |
3799 write-file-hooks to write-file-functions, | |
3800 write-contents-hooks to write-contents-functions, | |
3801 x-lost-selection-hooks to x-lost-selection-functions, | |
3802 x-sent-selection-hooks to x-sent-selection-functions. | |
3803 Marked local-write-file-hooks as obsolete (use the LOCAL arg of `add-hook'). | |
3804 | |
3805 +++ | |
3806 ** The new variable `delete-frame-functions' replaces `delete-frame-hook'. | |
3807 It was renamed to follow the naming conventions for abnormal hooks. The old | |
3808 name remains available as an alias, but has been marked obsolete. | |
3809 | 2903 |
3810 +++ | 2904 +++ |
3811 ** The `read-file-name' function now takes an additional argument which | 2905 ** The `read-file-name' function now takes an additional argument which |
3812 specifies a predicate which the file name read must satify. The | 2906 specifies a predicate which the file name read must satify. The |
3813 new variable `read-file-name-predicate' contains the predicate argument | 2907 new variable `read-file-name-predicate' contains the predicate argument |
3827 ** The new function `read-directory-name' can be used instead of | 2921 ** The new function `read-directory-name' can be used instead of |
3828 `read-file-name' to read a directory name; when used, completion | 2922 `read-file-name' to read a directory name; when used, completion |
3829 will only show directories. | 2923 will only show directories. |
3830 | 2924 |
3831 +++ | 2925 +++ |
3832 ** The new function `file-remote-p' tests a file name and returns | 2926 ** The new variable search-spaces-regexp controls how to search |
3833 non-nil if it specifies a remote file (one that Emacs accesses using | 2927 for spaces in a regular expression. If it is non-nil, it should be a |
3834 its own special methods and not directly through the file system). | 2928 regular expression, and any series of spaces stands for that regular |
3835 The value in that case is an identifier for the remote file system. | 2929 expression. If it is nil, spaces stand for themselves. |
3836 | 2930 |
3837 --- | 2931 Spaces inside of constructs such as [..] and *, +, ? are never |
3838 ** When a Lisp file uses CL functions at run-time, compiling the file | 2932 replaced with search-spaces-regexp. |
3839 now issues warnings about these calls, unless the file performs | 2933 |
3840 (require 'cl) when loaded. | 2934 +++ |
3841 | 2935 ** There are now two new regular expression operators, \_< and \_>, |
3842 +++ | 2936 for matching the beginning and end of a symbol. A symbol is a |
3843 ** The `defmacro' form may contain declarations specifying how to | 2937 non-empty sequence of either word or symbol constituent characters, as |
3844 indent the macro in Lisp mode and how to debug it with Edebug. The | 2938 specified by the syntax table. |
3845 syntax of defmacro has been extended to | 2939 |
3846 | 2940 +++ |
3847 (defmacro NAME LAMBDA-LIST [DOC-STRING] [DECLARATION ...] ...) | 2941 ** skip-chars-forward and skip-chars-backward now handle |
3848 | 2942 character classes such as [:alpha:], along with individual characters |
3849 DECLARATION is a list `(declare DECLARATION-SPECIFIER ...)'. The | 2943 and ranges. |
3850 declaration specifiers supported are: | 2944 |
3851 | 2945 --- |
3852 (indent INDENT) | 2946 ** In `replace-match', the replacement text no longer inherits |
3853 Set NAME's `lisp-indent-function' property to INDENT. | 2947 properties from surrounding text. |
3854 | 2948 |
3855 (edebug DEBUG) | 2949 +++ |
3856 Set NAME's `edebug-form-spec' property to DEBUG. (This is | 2950 ** The list returned by `(match-data t)' now has the buffer as a final |
3857 equivalent to writing a `def-edebug-spec' for the macro. | 2951 element, if the last match was on a buffer. `set-match-data' |
3858 | 2952 accepts such a list for restoring the match state. |
3859 +++ | 2953 |
3860 ** Interactive commands can be remapped through keymaps. | 2954 +++ |
2955 ** Variable aliases have been implemented: | |
2956 | |
2957 *** defvaralias ALIAS-VAR BASE-VAR [DOCSTRING] | |
2958 | |
2959 This function defines the symbol ALIAS-VAR as a variable alias for | |
2960 symbol BASE-VAR. This means that retrieving the value of ALIAS-VAR | |
2961 returns the value of BASE-VAR, and changing the value of ALIAS-VAR | |
2962 changes the value of BASE-VAR. | |
2963 | |
2964 DOCSTRING, if present, is the documentation for ALIAS-VAR; else it has | |
2965 the same documentation as BASE-VAR. | |
2966 | |
2967 *** indirect-variable VARIABLE | |
2968 | |
2969 This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases | |
2970 of VARIABLE. If VARIABLE is not a symbol, or if VARIABLE is not | |
2971 defined as an alias, the function returns VARIABLE. | |
2972 | |
2973 It might be noteworthy that variables aliases work for all kinds of | |
2974 variables, including buffer-local and frame-local variables. | |
2975 | |
2976 +++ | |
2977 *** The macro define-obsolete-variable-alias combines defvaralias and | |
2978 make-obsolete-variable. The macro define-obsolete-function-alias | |
2979 combines defalias and make-obsolete. | |
2980 | |
2981 +++ | |
2982 ** Enhancements to keymaps. | |
2983 | |
2984 *** Cleaner way to enter key sequences. | |
2985 | |
2986 You can enter a constant key sequence in a more natural format, the | |
2987 same one used for saving keyboard macros, using the macro `kbd'. For | |
2988 example, | |
2989 | |
2990 (kbd "C-x C-f") => "\^x\^f" | |
2991 | |
2992 *** Interactive commands can be remapped through keymaps. | |
3861 | 2993 |
3862 This is an alternative to using defadvice or substitute-key-definition | 2994 This is an alternative to using defadvice or substitute-key-definition |
3863 to modify the behavior of a key binding using the normal keymap | 2995 to modify the behavior of a key binding using the normal keymap |
3864 binding and lookup functionality. | 2996 binding and lookup functionality. |
3865 | 2997 |
3911 | 3043 |
3912 - The new variable `this-original-command' contains the original | 3044 - The new variable `this-original-command' contains the original |
3913 command before remapping. It is equal to `this-command' when the | 3045 command before remapping. It is equal to `this-command' when the |
3914 command was not remapped. | 3046 command was not remapped. |
3915 | 3047 |
3916 +++ | 3048 *** If text has a `keymap' property, that keymap takes precedence |
3917 ** New variable emulation-mode-map-alists. | 3049 over minor mode keymaps. |
3050 | |
3051 *** The `keymap' property now also works at the ends of overlays and | |
3052 text-properties, according to their stickiness. This also means that it | |
3053 works with empty overlays. The same hold for the `local-map' property. | |
3054 | |
3055 *** Dense keymaps now handle inheritance correctly. | |
3056 Previously a dense keymap would hide all of the simple-char key | |
3057 bindings of the parent keymap. | |
3058 | |
3059 *** `define-key-after' now accepts keys longer than 1. | |
3060 | |
3061 *** New function `current-active-maps' returns a list of currently | |
3062 active keymaps. | |
3063 | |
3064 *** New function `describe-buffer-bindings' inserts the list of all | |
3065 defined keys and their definitions. | |
3066 | |
3067 *** New function `keymap-prompt' returns the prompt-string of a keymap | |
3068 | |
3069 *** (map-keymap FUNCTION KEYMAP) applies the function to each binding | |
3070 in the keymap. | |
3071 | |
3072 *** New variable emulation-mode-map-alists. | |
3918 | 3073 |
3919 Lisp packages using many minor mode keymaps can now maintain their own | 3074 Lisp packages using many minor mode keymaps can now maintain their own |
3920 keymap alist separate from minor-mode-map-alist by adding their keymap | 3075 keymap alist separate from minor-mode-map-alist by adding their keymap |
3921 alist to this list. | 3076 alist to this list. |
3922 | 3077 |
3977 will lead to undesirable results, so don't let it happen; the first | 3132 will lead to undesirable results, so don't let it happen; the first |
3978 change group you start for any given buffer should be the last one | 3133 change group you start for any given buffer should be the last one |
3979 finished. | 3134 finished. |
3980 | 3135 |
3981 +++ | 3136 +++ |
3982 ** New variable char-property-alias-alist. | 3137 ** Progress reporters. |
3983 | 3138 The new functions `make-progress-reporter', `progress-reporter-update', |
3984 This variable allows you to create alternative names for text | 3139 `progress-reporter-force-update', `progress-reporter-done', and |
3985 properties. It works at the same level as `default-text-properties', | 3140 `dotimes-with-progress-reporter' provide a simple and efficient way for |
3986 although it applies to overlays as well. This variable was introduced | 3141 a command to present progress messages for the user. |
3987 to implement the `font-lock-face' property. | |
3988 | |
3989 +++ | |
3990 ** New special text property `font-lock-face'. | |
3991 | |
3992 This property acts like the `face' property, but it is controlled by | |
3993 M-x font-lock-mode. It is not, strictly speaking, a builtin text | |
3994 property. Instead, it is implemented inside font-core.el, using the | |
3995 new variable `char-property-alias-alist'. | |
3996 | |
3997 +++ | |
3998 ** New function remove-list-of-text-properties. | |
3999 | |
4000 The new function `remove-list-of-text-properties' is almost the same | |
4001 as `remove-text-properties'. The only difference is that it takes | |
4002 a list of property names as argument rather than a property list. | |
4003 | |
4004 +++ | |
4005 ** New function insert-for-yank. | |
4006 | |
4007 This function normally works like `insert' but removes the text | |
4008 properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list. However, if the | |
4009 inserted text has a `yank-handler' text property on the first | |
4010 character of the string, the insertion of the text may be modified in | |
4011 a number of ways. See the description of `yank-handler' below. | |
4012 | |
4013 +++ | |
4014 ** New function insert-buffer-substring-as-yank. | |
4015 | |
4016 This function works like `insert-buffer-substring', but removes the | |
4017 text properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list. | |
4018 | |
4019 +++ | |
4020 ** New function insert-buffer-substring-no-properties. | |
4021 | |
4022 This function is like insert-buffer-substring, but removes all | |
4023 text properties from the inserted substring. | |
4024 | 3142 |
4025 +++ | 3143 +++ |
4026 ** New `yank-handler' text property may be used to control how | 3144 ** New `yank-handler' text property may be used to control how |
4027 previously killed text on the kill-ring is reinserted. | 3145 previously killed text on the kill-ring is reinserted. |
4028 | 3146 |
4048 If UNDO is present and non-nil, it is a function that will be called | 3166 If UNDO is present and non-nil, it is a function that will be called |
4049 by `yank-pop' to undo the insertion of the current object. It is | 3167 by `yank-pop' to undo the insertion of the current object. It is |
4050 called with two arguments, the start and end of the current region. | 3168 called with two arguments, the start and end of the current region. |
4051 FUNCTION may set `yank-undo-function' to override the UNDO value. | 3169 FUNCTION may set `yank-undo-function' to override the UNDO value. |
4052 | 3170 |
4053 +++ | |
4054 *** The functions kill-new, kill-append, and kill-region now have an | 3171 *** The functions kill-new, kill-append, and kill-region now have an |
4055 optional argument to specify the yank-handler text property to put on | 3172 optional argument to specify the yank-handler text property to put on |
4056 the killed text. | 3173 the killed text. |
4057 | 3174 |
4058 +++ | |
4059 *** The function yank-pop will now use a non-nil value of the variable | 3175 *** The function yank-pop will now use a non-nil value of the variable |
4060 `yank-undo-function' (instead of delete-region) to undo the previous | 3176 `yank-undo-function' (instead of delete-region) to undo the previous |
4061 yank or yank-pop command (or a call to insert-for-yank). The function | 3177 yank or yank-pop command (or a call to insert-for-yank). The function |
4062 insert-for-yank automatically sets that variable according to the UNDO | 3178 insert-for-yank automatically sets that variable according to the UNDO |
4063 element of the string argument's yank-handler text property if present. | 3179 element of the string argument's yank-handler text property if present. |
4064 | 3180 |
4065 +++ | 3181 *** The function `insert-for-yank' now supports strings where the |
4066 ** New function display-supports-face-attributes-p may be used to test | 3182 `yank-handler' property does not span the first character of the |
4067 whether a given set of face attributes is actually displayable. | 3183 string. The old behavior is available if you call |
4068 | 3184 `insert-for-yank-1' instead. |
4069 A new predicate `supports' has also been added to the `defface' face | 3185 |
4070 specification language, which can be used to do this test for faces | 3186 *** The new function insert-for-yank normally works like `insert', but |
4071 defined with defface. | 3187 removes the text properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list. |
4072 | 3188 However, the insertion of the text may be modified by a `yank-handler' |
4073 --- | 3189 text property. |
4074 ** The function face-differs-from-default-p now truly checks whether the | 3190 |
4075 given face displays differently from the default face or not (previously | 3191 +++ |
4076 it did only a very cursory check). | 3192 ** An element of buffer-undo-list can now have the form (apply FUNNAME |
4077 | 3193 . ARGS), where FUNNAME is a symbol other than t or nil. That stands |
4078 +++ | 3194 for a high-level change that should be undone by evaluating (apply |
4079 ** face-attribute, face-foreground, face-background, and face-stipple now | 3195 FUNNAME ARGS). |
4080 accept a new optional argument, INHERIT, which controls how face | 3196 |
4081 inheritance is used when determining the value of a face attribute. | 3197 These entries can also have the form (apply DELTA BEG END FUNNAME . ARGS) |
4082 | 3198 which indicates that the change which took place was limited to the |
4083 +++ | 3199 range BEG...END and increased the buffer size by DELTA. |
4084 ** New functions face-attribute-relative-p and merge-face-attribute | 3200 |
4085 help with handling relative face attributes. | 3201 +++ |
4086 | 3202 ** If the buffer's undo list for the current command gets longer than |
4087 +++ | 3203 undo-outer-limit, garbage collection empties it. This is to prevent |
4088 ** The priority of faces in an :inherit attribute face-list is reversed. | 3204 it from using up the available memory and choking Emacs. |
4089 If a face contains an :inherit attribute with a list of faces, earlier | |
4090 faces in the list override later faces in the list; in previous releases | |
4091 of Emacs, the order was the opposite. This change was made so that | |
4092 :inherit face-lists operate identically to face-lists in text `face' | |
4093 properties. | |
4094 | 3205 |
4095 +++ | 3206 +++ |
4096 ** Enhancements to process support | 3207 ** Enhancements to process support |
4097 | 3208 |
4098 *** Function list-processes now has an optional argument; if non-nil, | 3209 *** Function list-processes now has an optional argument; if non-nil, |
4119 is handled, suspending output from other processes. If value is an | 3230 is handled, suspending output from other processes. If value is an |
4120 integer, also inhibit running timers. This feature is generally not | 3231 integer, also inhibit running timers. This feature is generally not |
4121 recommended, but may be necessary for specific applications, such as | 3232 recommended, but may be necessary for specific applications, such as |
4122 speech synthesis. | 3233 speech synthesis. |
4123 | 3234 |
4124 --- | |
4125 *** Adaptive read buffering of subprocess output. | 3235 *** Adaptive read buffering of subprocess output. |
4126 | 3236 |
4127 On some systems, when emacs reads the output from a subprocess, the | 3237 On some systems, when emacs reads the output from a subprocess, the |
4128 output data is read in very small blocks, potentially resulting in | 3238 output data is read in very small blocks, potentially resulting in |
4129 very poor performance. This behavior can be remedied to some extent | 3239 very poor performance. This behavior can be remedied to some extent |
4130 by setting the new variable process-adaptive-read-buffering to a | 3240 by setting the new variable process-adaptive-read-buffering to a |
4131 non-nil value (the default), as it will automatically delay reading | 3241 non-nil value (the default), as it will automatically delay reading |
4132 from such processes, to allowing them to produce more output before | 3242 from such processes, to allowing them to produce more output before |
4133 emacs tries to read it. | 3243 emacs tries to read it. |
3244 | |
3245 *** The new function `call-process-shell-command' executes a shell | |
3246 command command synchronously in a separate process. | |
3247 | |
3248 *** The new function `process-file' is similar to `call-process', but | |
3249 obeys file handlers. The file handler is chosen based on | |
3250 default-directory. | |
3251 | |
3252 *** The new function `set-process-filter-multibyte' sets the | |
3253 multibyteness of a string given to a process's filter. | |
3254 | |
3255 *** The new function `process-filter-multibyte-p' returns t if a | |
3256 string given to a process's filter is multibyte. | |
3257 | |
3258 *** A filter function of a process is called with a multibyte string | |
3259 if the filter's multibyteness is t. That multibyteness is decided by | |
3260 the value of `default-enable-multibyte-characters' when the process is | |
3261 created and can be changed later by `set-process-filter-multibyte'. | |
3262 | |
3263 *** If a process's coding system is raw-text or no-conversion and its | |
3264 buffer is multibyte, the output of the process is at first converted | |
3265 to multibyte by `string-to-multibyte' then inserted in the buffer. | |
3266 Previously, it was converted to multibyte by `string-as-multibyte', | |
3267 which was not compatible with the behavior of file reading. | |
4134 | 3268 |
4135 +++ | 3269 +++ |
4136 ** Enhanced networking support. | 3270 ** Enhanced networking support. |
4137 | 3271 |
4138 *** There is a new `make-network-process' function which supports | 3272 *** There is a new `make-network-process' function which supports |
4203 *** New function network-interface-info. | 3337 *** New function network-interface-info. |
4204 | 3338 |
4205 This function returns the network address, hardware address, current | 3339 This function returns the network address, hardware address, current |
4206 status, and other information about a specific network interface. | 3340 status, and other information about a specific network interface. |
4207 | 3341 |
4208 +++ | 3342 *** The sentinel is now called when a network process is deleted with |
4209 ** New function copy-tree. | 3343 delete-process. The status message passed to the sentinel for a |
4210 | 3344 deleted network process is "deleted". The message passed to the |
4211 +++ | 3345 sentinel when the connection is closed by the remote peer has been |
4212 ** New function substring-no-properties. | 3346 changed to "connection broken by remote peer". |
4213 | 3347 |
4214 +++ | 3348 +++ |
4215 ** New function minibuffer-selected-window. | 3349 ** New function `force-window-update' can initiate a full redisplay of |
4216 | 3350 one or all windows. Normally, this is not needed as changes in window |
4217 +++ | 3351 contents are detected automatically. However, certain implicit |
4218 ** New function `call-process-shell-command'. | 3352 changes to mode lines, header lines, or display properties may require |
4219 | 3353 forcing an explicit window update. |
4220 +++ | 3354 |
4221 ** New function `process-file'. | 3355 +++ |
4222 | 3356 ** You can now make a window as short as one line. |
4223 This is similar to `call-process', but obeys file handlers. The file | 3357 |
4224 handler is chosen based on default-directory. | 3358 A window that is just one line tall does not display either a mode |
4225 | 3359 line or a header line, even if the variables `mode-line-format' and |
4226 --- | 3360 `header-line-format' call for them. A window that is two lines tall |
4227 ** The dummy function keys made by easymenu | 3361 cannot display both a mode line and a header line at once; if the |
4228 are now always lower case. If you specify the | 3362 variables call for both, only the mode line actually appears. |
4229 menu item name "Ada", for instance, it uses `ada' | 3363 |
3364 +++ | |
3365 ** The line-move, scroll-up, and scroll-down functions will now | |
3366 modify the window vscroll to scroll through display rows that are | |
3367 taller that the height of the window, for example in the presense of | |
3368 large images. To disable this feature, Lisp code may bind the new | |
3369 variable `auto-window-vscroll' to nil. | |
3370 | |
3371 +++ | |
3372 ** Function `compute-motion' now calculates the usable window | |
3373 width if the WIDTH argument is nil. If the TOPOS argument is nil, | |
3374 the usable window height and width is used. | |
3375 | |
3376 +++ | |
3377 ** Function pos-visible-in-window-p now returns the pixel coordinates | |
3378 and partial visiblity state of the corresponding row, if the PARTIALLY | |
3379 arg is non-nil. | |
3380 | |
3381 +++ | |
3382 ** The new function `window-inside-edges' returns the edges of the | |
3383 actual text portion of the window, not including the scroll bar or | |
3384 divider line, the fringes, the display margins, the header line and | |
3385 the mode line. | |
3386 | |
3387 +++ | |
3388 ** The new functions `window-pixel-edges' and `window-inside-pixel-edges' | |
3389 return window edges in units of pixels, rather than columns and lines. | |
3390 | |
3391 +++ | |
3392 ** The new macro `with-selected-window' temporarily switches the | |
3393 selected window without impacting the order of buffer-list. | |
3394 | |
3395 +++ | |
3396 ** `select-window' takes an optional second argument `norecord', like | |
3397 `switch-to-buffer'. | |
3398 | |
3399 +++ | |
3400 ** `save-selected-window' now saves and restores the selected window | |
3401 of every frame. This way, it restores everything that can be changed | |
3402 by calling `select-window'. | |
3403 | |
3404 +++ | |
3405 ** The function `set-window-buffer' now has an optional third argument | |
3406 KEEP-MARGINS which will preserve the window's current margin, fringe, | |
3407 and scroll-bar settings if non-nil. | |
3408 | |
3409 +++ | |
3410 ** Customizable fringe bitmaps | |
3411 | |
3412 *** New function 'define-fringe-bitmap' can now be used to create new | |
3413 fringe bitmaps, as well as change the built-in fringe bitmaps. | |
3414 | |
3415 To change a built-in bitmap, do (require 'fringe) and use the symbol | |
3416 identifing the bitmap such as `left-truncation or `continued-line'. | |
3417 | |
3418 *** New function 'destroy-fringe-bitmap' may be used to destroy a | |
3419 previously created bitmap, or restore a built-in bitmap. | |
3420 | |
3421 *** New function 'set-fringe-bitmap-face' can now be used to set a | |
3422 specific face to be used for a specific fringe bitmap. The face is | |
3423 automatically merged with the `fringe' face, so normally, the face | |
3424 should only specify the foreground color of the bitmap. | |
3425 | |
3426 *** There are new display properties, left-fringe and right-fringe, | |
3427 that can be used to show a specific bitmap in the left or right fringe | |
3428 bitmap of the display line. | |
3429 | |
3430 Format is 'display '(left-fringe BITMAP [FACE]), where BITMAP is a | |
3431 symbol identifying a fringe bitmap, either built-in or defined with | |
3432 `define-fringe-bitmap', and FACE is an optional face name to be used | |
3433 for displaying the bitmap instead of the default `fringe' face. | |
3434 When specified, FACE is automatically merged with the `fringe' face. | |
3435 | |
3436 *** New function `fringe-bitmaps-at-pos' returns the current fringe | |
3437 bitmaps in the display line at a given buffer position. | |
3438 | |
3439 +++ | |
3440 ** Controlling the default left and right fringe widths. | |
3441 | |
3442 The default left and right fringe widths for all windows of a frame | |
3443 can now be controlled by setting the `left-fringe' and `right-fringe' | |
3444 frame parameters to an integer value specifying the width in pixels. | |
3445 Setting the width to 0 effectively removes the corresponding fringe. | |
3446 | |
3447 The actual default fringe widths for the frame may deviate from the | |
3448 specified widths, since the combined fringe widths must match an | |
3449 integral number of columns. The extra width is distributed evenly | |
3450 between the left and right fringe. For force a specific fringe width, | |
3451 specify the width as a negative integer (if both widths are negative, | |
3452 only the left fringe gets the specified width). | |
3453 | |
3454 Setting the width to nil (the default), restores the default fringe | |
3455 width which is the minimum number of pixels necessary to display any | |
3456 of the currently defined fringe bitmaps. The width of the built-in | |
3457 fringe bitmaps is 8 pixels. | |
3458 | |
3459 +++ | |
3460 ** Per-window fringe and scrollbar settings | |
3461 | |
3462 *** Windows can now have their own individual fringe widths and | |
3463 position settings. | |
3464 | |
3465 To control the fringe widths of a window, either set the buffer-local | |
3466 variables `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', or call | |
3467 `set-window-fringes'. | |
3468 | |
3469 To control the fringe position in a window, that is, whether fringes | |
3470 are positioned between the display margins and the window's text area, | |
3471 or at the edges of the window, either set the buffer-local variable | |
3472 `fringes-outside-margins' or call `set-window-fringes'. | |
3473 | |
3474 The function `window-fringes' can be used to obtain the current | |
3475 settings. To make `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', and | |
3476 `fringes-outside-margins' take effect, you must set them before | |
3477 displaying the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force | |
3478 an update of the display margins. | |
3479 | |
3480 *** Windows can now have their own individual scroll-bar settings | |
3481 controlling the width and position of scroll-bars. | |
3482 | |
3483 To control the scroll-bar of a window, either set the buffer-local | |
3484 variables `scroll-bar-mode' and `scroll-bar-width', or call | |
3485 `set-window-scroll-bars'. The function `window-scroll-bars' can be | |
3486 used to obtain the current settings. To make `scroll-bar-mode' and | |
3487 `scroll-bar-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
3488 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
3489 of the display margins. | |
3490 | |
3491 +++ | |
3492 ** When using non-toolkit scroll bars with the default width, | |
3493 the scroll-bar-width frame parameter value is nil. | |
3494 | |
3495 +++ | |
3496 ** Multiple overlay arrows can now be defined and managed via the new | |
3497 variable `overlay-arrow-variable-list'. It contains a list of | |
3498 varibles which contain overlay arrow position markers, including | |
3499 the original `overlay-arrow-position' variable. | |
3500 | |
3501 Each variable on this list may have individual `overlay-arrow-string' | |
3502 and `overlay-arrow-bitmap' properties that specify an overlay arrow | |
3503 string (for non-window terminals) or fringe bitmap (for window | |
3504 systems) to display at the corresponding overlay arrow position. | |
3505 If either property is not set, the default `overlay-arrow-string' or | |
3506 'overlay-arrow-fringe-bitmap' will be used. | |
3507 | |
3508 +++ | |
3509 ** New line-height and line-spacing properties for newline characters | |
3510 | |
3511 A newline may now have line-height and line-spacing text or overlay | |
3512 properties that control the height of the corresponding display row. | |
3513 | |
3514 If the line-height property value is t, the newline does not | |
3515 contribute to the height of the display row; instead the height of the | |
3516 newline glyph is reduced. Also, a line-spacing property on this | |
3517 newline is ignored. This can be used to tile small images or image | |
3518 slices without adding blank areas between the images. | |
3519 | |
3520 If the line-height property value is a positive integer, the value | |
3521 specifies the minimum line height in pixels. If necessary, the line | |
3522 height it increased by increasing the line's ascent. | |
3523 | |
3524 If the line-height property value is a float, the minimum line height | |
3525 is calculated by multiplying the default frame line height by the | |
3526 given value. | |
3527 | |
3528 If the line-height property value is a cons (FACE . RATIO), the | |
3529 minimum line height is calculated as RATIO * height of named FACE. | |
3530 RATIO is int or float. If FACE is t, it specifies the current face. | |
3531 | |
3532 If the line-height property value is a cons (nil . RATIO), the line | |
3533 height is calculated as RATIO * actual height of the line's contents. | |
3534 | |
3535 If the line-height value is a cons (HEIGHT . TOTAL), HEIGHT specifies | |
3536 the line height as described above, while TOTAL is any of the forms | |
3537 described above and specifies the total height of the line, causing a | |
3538 varying number of pixels to be inserted after the line to make it line | |
3539 exactly that many pixels high. | |
3540 | |
3541 If the line-spacing property value is an positive integer, the value | |
3542 is used as additional pixels to insert after the display line; this | |
3543 overrides the default frame line-spacing and any buffer local value of | |
3544 the line-spacing variable. | |
3545 | |
3546 If the line-spacing property may be a float or cons, the line spacing | |
3547 is calculated as specified above for the line-height property. | |
3548 | |
3549 +++ | |
3550 ** The buffer local line-spacing variable may now have a float value, | |
3551 which is used as a height relative to the default frame line height. | |
3552 | |
3553 +++ | |
3554 ** Enhancements to stretch display properties | |
3555 | |
3556 The display property stretch specification form `(space PROPS)', where | |
3557 PROPS is a property list now allows pixel based width and height | |
3558 specifications, as well as enhanced horizontal text alignment. | |
3559 | |
3560 The value of these properties can now be a (primitive) expression | |
3561 which is evaluated during redisplay. The following expressions | |
3562 are supported: | |
3563 | |
3564 EXPR ::= NUM | (NUM) | UNIT | ELEM | POS | IMAGE | FORM | |
3565 NUM ::= INTEGER | FLOAT | SYMBOL | |
3566 UNIT ::= in | mm | cm | width | height | |
3567 ELEM ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin | |
3568 | scroll-bar | text | |
3569 POS ::= left | center | right | |
3570 FORM ::= (NUM . EXPR) | (OP EXPR ...) | |
3571 OP ::= + | - | |
3572 | |
3573 The form `NUM' specifies a fractional width or height of the default | |
3574 frame font size. The form `(NUM)' specifies an absolute number of | |
3575 pixels. If a symbol is specified, its buffer-local variable binding | |
3576 is used. The `in', `mm', and `cm' units specifies the number of | |
3577 pixels per inch, milli-meter, and centi-meter, resp. The `width' and | |
3578 `height' units correspond to the width and height of the current face | |
3579 font. An image specification corresponds to the width or height of | |
3580 the image. | |
3581 | |
3582 The `left-fringe', `right-fringe', `left-margin', `right-margin', | |
3583 `scroll-bar', and `text' elements specify to the width of the | |
3584 corresponding area of the window. | |
3585 | |
3586 The `left', `center', and `right' positions can be used with :align-to | |
3587 to specify a position relative to the left edge, center, or right edge | |
3588 of the text area. One of the above window elements (except `text') | |
3589 can also be used with :align-to to specify that the position is | |
3590 relative to the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for | |
3591 a relative position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of | |
3592 these symbols), further occurences of these symbols are interpreted as | |
3593 the width of the area. | |
3594 | |
3595 For example, to align to the center of the left-margin, use | |
3596 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin)) | |
3597 | |
3598 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative | |
3599 to the left edge of the text area. For example, :align-to 0 in a | |
3600 header-line aligns with the first text column in the text area. | |
3601 | |
3602 The value of the form `(NUM . EXPR)' is the value of NUM multiplied by | |
3603 the value of the expression EXPR. For example, (2 . in) specifies a | |
3604 width of 2 inches, while (0.5 . IMAGE) specifies half the width (or | |
3605 height) of the specified image. | |
3606 | |
3607 The form `(+ EXPR ...)' adds up the value of the expressions. | |
3608 The form `(- EXPR ...)' negates or subtracts the value of the expressions. | |
3609 | |
3610 +++ | |
3611 ** Support for displaying image slices | |
3612 | |
3613 *** New display property (slice X Y WIDTH HEIGHT) may be used with | |
3614 an image property to display only a specific slice of the image. | |
3615 | |
3616 *** Function insert-image has new optional fourth arg to | |
3617 specify image slice (X Y WIDTH HEIGHT). | |
3618 | |
3619 *** New function insert-sliced-image inserts a given image as a | |
3620 specified number of evenly sized slices (rows x columns). | |
3621 | |
3622 +++ | |
3623 ** Images may now have an associated image map via the :map property. | |
3624 | |
3625 An image map is an alist where each element has the format (AREA ID PLIST). | |
3626 An AREA is specified as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon: | |
3627 A rectangle is a cons (rect . ((x0 . y0) . (x1 . y1))) specifying the | |
3628 pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right corners. | |
3629 A circle is a cons (circle . ((x0 . y0) . r)) specifying the center | |
3630 and the radius of the circle; r may be a float or integer. | |
3631 A polygon is a cons (poly . [x0 y0 x1 y1 ...]) where each pair in the | |
3632 vector describes one corner in the polygon. | |
3633 | |
3634 When the mouse pointer is above a hot-spot area of an image, the | |
3635 PLIST of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a `help-echo' | |
3636 property it defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains | |
3637 a `pointer' property, it defines the shape of the mouse cursor when | |
3638 it is over the hot-spot. See the variable 'void-area-text-pointer' | |
3639 for possible pointer shapes. | |
3640 | |
3641 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot, | |
3642 an event is composed by combining the ID of the hot-spot with the | |
3643 mouse event, e.g. [area4 mouse-1] if the hot-spot's ID is `area4'. | |
3644 | |
3645 +++ (lispref) | |
3646 ??? (man) | |
3647 ** The mouse pointer shape in void text areas (i.e. after the end of a | |
3648 line or below the last line in the buffer) of the text window is now | |
3649 controlled by the new variable `void-text-area-pointer'. The default | |
3650 is to use the `arrow' (non-text) pointer. Other choices are `text' | |
3651 (or nil), `hand', `vdrag', `hdrag', `modeline', and `hourglass'. | |
3652 | |
3653 +++ | |
3654 ** The mouse pointer shape over an image can now be controlled by the | |
3655 :pointer image property. | |
3656 | |
3657 +++ | |
3658 ** Lisp code can now test if a given buffer position is inside a | |
3659 clickable link with the new function `mouse-on-link-p'. This is the | |
3660 function used by the new `mouse-1-click-follows-link' functionality. | |
3661 | |
3662 +++ | |
3663 ** The mouse pointer shape over ordinary text or images may now be | |
3664 controlled/overriden via the `pointer' text property. | |
3665 | |
3666 ** Mouse event enhancements: | |
3667 | |
3668 +++ | |
3669 *** Mouse clicks on fringes now generates left-fringe or right-fringes | |
3670 events, rather than a text area click event. | |
3671 | |
3672 +++ | |
3673 *** Mouse clicks in the left and right marginal areas now includes a | |
3674 sensible buffer position corresponding to the first character in the | |
3675 corresponding text row. | |
3676 | |
3677 +++ | |
3678 *** Function `mouse-set-point' now works for events outside text area. | |
3679 | |
3680 +++ | |
3681 *** Mouse events now includes buffer position for all event types. | |
3682 | |
3683 +++ | |
3684 *** `posn-point' now returns buffer position for non-text area events. | |
3685 | |
3686 +++ | |
3687 *** New function `posn-area' returns window area clicked on (nil means | |
3688 text area). | |
3689 | |
3690 +++ | |
3691 *** Mouse events include actual glyph column and row for all event types. | |
3692 | |
3693 +++ | |
3694 *** New function `posn-actual-col-row' returns actual glyph coordinates. | |
3695 | |
3696 +++ | |
3697 *** Mouse events may now include image object in addition to string object. | |
3698 | |
3699 +++ | |
3700 *** Mouse events include relative x and y pixel coordinates relative to | |
3701 the top left corner of the object (image or character) clicked on. | |
3702 | |
3703 +++ | |
3704 *** Mouse events include the pixel width and height of the object | |
3705 (image or character) clicked on. | |
3706 | |
3707 +++ | |
3708 *** New functions 'posn-object', 'posn-object-x-y', and | |
3709 'posn-object-width-height' return the image or string object of a mouse | |
3710 click, the x and y pixel coordinates relative to the top left corner | |
3711 of that object, and the total width and height of that object. | |
3712 | |
3713 +++ | |
3714 ** At the end of a command, point moves out from within invisible | |
3715 text, in the same way it moves out from within text covered by an | |
3716 image or composition property. | |
3717 | |
3718 This makes it generally unnecessary to mark invisible text as intangible. | |
3719 This is particularly good because the intangible property often has | |
3720 unexpected side-effects since the property applies to everything | |
3721 (including `goto-char', ...) whereas this new code is only run after | |
3722 post-command-hook and thus does not care about intermediate states. | |
3723 | |
3724 +++ | |
3725 ** Normally, the cursor is displayed at the end of any overlay and | |
3726 text property string that may be present at the current window | |
3727 position. The cursor may now be placed on any character of such | |
3728 strings by giving that character a non-nil `cursor' text property. | |
3729 | |
3730 +++ | |
3731 ** The display space :width and :align-to text properties are now | |
3732 supported on text terminals. | |
3733 | |
3734 +++ | |
3735 ** Arguments for remove-overlays are now optional, so that you can | |
3736 remove all overlays in the buffer by just calling (remove-overlay). | |
3737 | |
3738 +++ | |
3739 ** New variable char-property-alias-alist. | |
3740 | |
3741 This variable allows you to create alternative names for text | |
3742 properties. It works at the same level as `default-text-properties', | |
3743 although it applies to overlays as well. This variable was introduced | |
3744 to implement the `font-lock-face' property. | |
3745 | |
3746 +++ | |
3747 ** New function `get-char-property-and-overlay' accepts the same | |
3748 arguments as `get-char-property' and returns a cons whose car is the | |
3749 return value of `get-char-property' called with those arguments and | |
3750 whose cdr is the overlay in which the property was found, or nil if | |
3751 it was found as a text property or not found at all. | |
3752 | |
3753 +++ | |
3754 ** The new frame parameter `tty-color-mode' specifies the mode to use | |
3755 for color support on character terminal frames. Its value can be a | |
3756 number of colors to support, or a symbol. See the Emacs Lisp | |
3757 Reference manual for more detailed documentation. | |
3758 | |
3759 +++ | |
3760 ** The new face attribute `min-colors' can be used to tailor the face | |
3761 color to the number of colors supported by a display, and define the | |
3762 foreground and background colors accordingly so that they look best on | |
3763 a terminal that supports at least this many colors. This is now the | |
3764 preferred method for defining default faces in a way that makes a good | |
3765 use of the capabilities of the display. | |
3766 | |
3767 +++ | |
3768 ** (char-displayable-p CHAR) returns non-nil if Emacs ought to be able | |
3769 to display CHAR. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has | |
3770 a font to display the character set that CHAR belongs to. | |
3771 | |
3772 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset | |
3773 does that, this value may not be accurate. | |
3774 | |
3775 +++ | |
3776 ** New function display-supports-face-attributes-p may be used to test | |
3777 whether a given set of face attributes is actually displayable. | |
3778 | |
3779 A new predicate `supports' has also been added to the `defface' face | |
3780 specification language, which can be used to do this test for faces | |
3781 defined with defface. | |
3782 | |
3783 --- | |
3784 ** The special treatment of faces whose names are of the form `fg:COLOR' | |
3785 or `bg:COLOR' has been removed. Lisp programs should use the | |
3786 `defface' facility for defining faces with specific colors, or use | |
3787 the feature of specifying the face attributes :foreground and :background | |
3788 directly in the `face' property instead of using a named face. | |
3789 | |
3790 +++ | |
3791 ** The first face specification element in a defface can specify | |
3792 `default' instead of frame classification. Then its attributes act as | |
3793 defaults that apply to all the subsequent cases (and may be overridden | |
3794 by them). | |
3795 | |
3796 +++ | |
3797 ** The variable `face-font-rescale-alist' specifies how much larger | |
3798 (or smaller) font we should use. For instance, if the value is | |
3799 '((SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN . 1.3)) and a face requests a font of 10 | |
3800 point, we actually use a font of 13 point if the font matches | |
3801 SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN. | |
3802 | |
3803 --- | |
3804 ** `set-fontset-font', `fontset-info', `fontset-font' now operate on | |
3805 the default fontset if the argument NAME is nil.. | |
3806 | |
3807 --- | |
3808 ** The function face-differs-from-default-p now truly checks whether the | |
3809 given face displays differently from the default face or not (previously | |
3810 it did only a very cursory check). | |
3811 | |
3812 +++ | |
3813 ** face-attribute, face-foreground, face-background, and face-stipple now | |
3814 accept a new optional argument, INHERIT, which controls how face | |
3815 inheritance is used when determining the value of a face attribute. | |
3816 | |
3817 +++ | |
3818 ** New functions face-attribute-relative-p and merge-face-attribute | |
3819 help with handling relative face attributes. | |
3820 | |
3821 +++ | |
3822 ** The priority of faces in an :inherit attribute face-list is reversed. | |
3823 If a face contains an :inherit attribute with a list of faces, earlier | |
3824 faces in the list override later faces in the list; in previous releases | |
3825 of Emacs, the order was the opposite. This change was made so that | |
3826 :inherit face-lists operate identically to face-lists in text `face' | |
3827 properties. | |
3828 | |
3829 +++ | |
3830 ** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-preprocessor-face'. | |
3831 | |
3832 +++ | |
3833 ** New special text property `font-lock-face'. | |
3834 | |
3835 This property acts like the `face' property, but it is controlled by | |
3836 M-x font-lock-mode. It is not, strictly speaking, a builtin text | |
3837 property. Instead, it is implemented inside font-core.el, using the | |
3838 new variable `char-property-alias-alist'. | |
3839 | |
3840 --- | |
3841 ** jit-lock obeys a new text-property `jit-lock-defer-multiline'. | |
3842 If a piece of text with that property gets contextually refontified | |
3843 (see jit-lock-defer-contextually), then all of that text will | |
3844 be refontified. This is useful when the syntax of a textual element | |
3845 depends on text several lines further down (and when font-lock-multiline | |
3846 is not appropriate to solve that problem). For example in Perl: | |
3847 | |
3848 s{ | |
3849 foo | |
3850 }{ | |
3851 bar | |
3852 }e | |
3853 | |
3854 Adding/removing the last `e' changes the `bar' from being a piece of | |
3855 text to being a piece of code, so you'd put a jit-lock-defer-multiline | |
3856 property over the second half of the command to force (deferred) | |
3857 refontification of `bar' whenever the `e' is added/removed. | |
3858 | |
3859 +++ | |
3860 ** font-lock can manage arbitrary text-properties beside `face'. | |
3861 *** the FACENAME returned in font-lock-keywords can be a list | |
3862 of the form (face FACE PROP1 VAL1 PROP2 VAL2 ...) so you can set | |
3863 other properties than `face'. | |
3864 *** font-lock-extra-managed-props can be set to make sure those extra | |
3865 properties are automatically cleaned up by font-lock. | |
3866 | |
3867 --- | |
3868 ** The precedence of file-name-handlers has been changed. | |
3869 Instead of blindly choosing the first handler that matches, | |
3870 find-file-name-handler now gives precedence to a file-name handler | |
3871 that matches near the end of the file name. More specifically, the | |
3872 handler whose (match-beginning 0) is the largest is chosen. | |
3873 In case of ties, the old "first matched" rule applies. | |
3874 | |
3875 +++ | |
3876 ** A file name handler can declare which operations it handles. | |
3877 | |
3878 You do this by putting an `operation' property on the handler name | |
3879 symbol. The property value should be a list of the operations that | |
3880 the handler really handles. It won't be called for any other | |
3881 operations. | |
3882 | |
3883 This is useful for autoloaded handlers, to prevent them from being | |
3884 autoloaded when not really necessary. | |
3885 | |
3886 +++ | |
3887 ** `set-auto-mode' now gives the interpreter magic line (if present) | |
3888 precedence over the file name. Likewise an <?xml or <!DOCTYPE declaration | |
3889 will give the buffer XML or SGML mode, based on the new var | |
3890 `magic-mode-alist'. | |
3891 | |
3892 +++ | |
3893 ** Major mode functions now run the new normal hook | |
3894 `after-change-major-mode-hook', at their very end, after the mode hooks. | |
3895 | |
3896 --- | |
3897 ** If a major mode function has a non-nil `no-clone-indirect' | |
3898 property, `clone-indirect-buffer' signals an error if you use | |
3899 it in that buffer. | |
3900 | |
3901 +++ | |
3902 ** Major modes can define `eldoc-documentation-function' | |
3903 locally to provide Eldoc functionality by some method appropriate to | |
3904 the language. | |
3905 | |
3906 +++ | |
3907 ** define-derived-mode by default creates a new empty abbrev table. | |
3908 It does not copy abbrevs from the parent mode's abbrev table. | |
3909 | |
3910 +++ | |
3911 ** define-minor-mode now accepts arbitrary additional keyword arguments | |
3912 and simply passes them to defcustom, if applicable. | |
3913 | |
3914 +++ | |
3915 ** The new function `run-mode-hooks' and the new macro `delay-mode-hooks' | |
3916 are used by define-derived-mode to make sure the mode hook for the | |
3917 parent mode is run at the end of the child mode. | |
3918 | |
3919 +++ | |
3920 ** `minor-mode-list' now holds a list of minor mode commands. | |
3921 | |
3922 +++ | |
3923 ** Both the variable and the function `disabled-command-hook' have | |
3924 been renamed to `disabled-command-function'. The variable | |
3925 `disabled-command-hook' has been kept as an obsolete alias. | |
3926 | |
3927 +++ | |
3928 ** The function `eql' is now available without requiring the CL package. | |
3929 | |
3930 +++ | |
3931 ** If optional third argument APPEND to `add-to-list' is non-nil, a | |
3932 new element gets added at the end of the list instead of at the | |
3933 beginning. This change actually occurred in Emacs-21.1, but was not | |
3934 documented. | |
3935 | |
3936 +++ | |
3937 ** The escape sequence \s is now interpreted as a SPACE character, | |
3938 unless it is followed by a `-' in a character constant (e.g. ?\s-A), | |
3939 in which case it is still interpreted as the super modifier. | |
3940 In strings, \s is always interpreted as a space. | |
3941 | |
3942 +++ | |
3943 ** A hex escape in a string forces the string to be multibyte. | |
3944 An octal escape makes it unibyte. | |
3945 | |
3946 +++ | |
3947 ** `split-string' now includes null substrings in the returned list if | |
3948 the optional argument SEPARATORS is non-nil and there are matches for | |
3949 SEPARATORS at the beginning or end of the string. If SEPARATORS is | |
3950 nil, or if the new optional third argument OMIT-NULLS is non-nil, all | |
3951 empty matches are omitted from the returned list. | |
3952 | |
3953 +++ | |
3954 ** New function `string-to-multibyte' converts a unibyte string to a | |
3955 multibyte string with the same individual character codes. | |
3956 | |
3957 +++ | |
3958 ** The function `number-sequence' returns a list of equally-separated | |
3959 numbers. For instance, (number-sequence 4 9) returns (4 5 6 7 8 9). | |
3960 By default, the separation is 1, but you can specify a different separation | |
3961 as the third argument. (number-sequence 1.5 6 2) returns (1.5 3.5 5.5). | |
3962 | |
3963 +++ | |
3964 ** `sit-for' can now be called with args (SECONDS &optional NODISP). | |
3965 | |
3966 +++ | |
3967 ** A function's docstring can now hold the function's usage info on | |
3968 its last line. It should match the regexp "\n\n(fn.*)\\'". | |
3969 | |
3970 +++ | |
3971 ** The `defmacro' form may contain declarations specifying how to | |
3972 indent the macro in Lisp mode and how to debug it with Edebug. The | |
3973 syntax of defmacro has been extended to | |
3974 | |
3975 (defmacro NAME LAMBDA-LIST [DOC-STRING] [DECLARATION ...] ...) | |
3976 | |
3977 DECLARATION is a list `(declare DECLARATION-SPECIFIER ...)'. The | |
3978 declaration specifiers supported are: | |
3979 | |
3980 (indent INDENT) | |
3981 Set NAME's `lisp-indent-function' property to INDENT. | |
3982 | |
3983 (edebug DEBUG) | |
3984 Set NAME's `edebug-form-spec' property to DEBUG. (This is | |
3985 equivalent to writing a `def-edebug-spec' for the macro. | |
3986 | |
3987 +++ | |
3988 ** The functions all-completions and try-completion now accept lists | |
3989 of strings as well as hash-tables additionally to alists, obarrays | |
3990 and functions. Furthermore, the function `test-completion' is now | |
3991 exported to Lisp. The keys in alists and hash tables may be either | |
3992 strings or symbols, which are automatically converted with to strings. | |
3993 | |
3994 +++ | |
3995 ** The new macro dynamic-completion-table supports using functions | |
3996 as a dynamic completion table. | |
3997 | |
3998 (dynamic-completion-table FUN) | |
3999 | |
4000 FUN is called with one argument, the string for which completion is required, | |
4001 and it should return an alist containing all the intended possible | |
4002 completions. This alist may be a full list of possible completions so that FUN | |
4003 can ignore the value of its argument. If completion is performed in the | |
4004 minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer from which the minibuffer was | |
4005 entered. dynamic-completion-table then computes the completion. | |
4006 | |
4007 +++ | |
4008 ** The new macro lazy-completion-table initializes a variable | |
4009 as a lazy completion table. | |
4010 | |
4011 (lazy-completion-table VAR FUN &rest ARGS) | |
4012 | |
4013 If the completion table VAR is used for the first time (e.g., by passing VAR | |
4014 as an argument to `try-completion'), the function FUN is called with arguments | |
4015 ARGS. FUN must return the completion table that will be stored in VAR. If | |
4016 completion is requested in the minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer | |
4017 from which the minibuffer was entered. The return value of | |
4018 `lazy-completion-table' must be used to initialize the value of VAR. | |
4019 | |
4020 +++ | |
4021 ** `load-history' can now have elements of the form (t . FUNNAME), | |
4022 which means FUNNAME was previously defined as an autoload (before the | |
4023 current file redefined it). | |
4024 | |
4025 +++ | |
4026 ** `load-history' now records (defun . FUNNAME) when a function is | |
4027 defined. For a variable, it records just the variable name. | |
4028 | |
4029 --- | |
4030 ** The variable `recursive-load-depth-limit' has been deleted. | |
4031 Emacs now signals an error if the same file is loaded with more | |
4032 than 3 levels of nesting. | |
4033 | |
4034 +++ | |
4035 ** The function symbol-file can now search specifically for function or | |
4036 variable definitions. | |
4037 | |
4038 +++ | |
4039 ** `provide' and `featurep' now accept an optional second argument | |
4040 to test/provide subfeatures. Also `provide' now checks `after-load-alist' | |
4041 and runs any code associated with the provided feature. | |
4042 | |
4043 +++ | |
4044 ** `declare' is now a macro. This change was made mostly for | |
4045 documentation purposes and should have no real effect on Lisp code. | |
4046 | |
4047 +++ | |
4048 ** Byte compiler changes: | |
4049 | |
4050 *** The byte-compiler now displays the actual line and character | |
4051 position of errors, where possible. Additionally, the form of its | |
4052 warning and error messages have been brought more in line with the | |
4053 output of other GNU tools. | |
4054 | |
4055 *** The new macro `with-no-warnings' suppresses all compiler warnings | |
4056 inside its body. In terms of execution, it is equivalent to `progn'. | |
4057 | |
4058 *** You can avoid warnings for possibly-undefined symbols with a | |
4059 simple convention that the compiler understands. (This is mostly | |
4060 useful in code meant to be portable to different Emacs versions.) | |
4061 Write forms like the following, or code that macroexpands into such | |
4062 forms: | |
4063 | |
4064 (if (fboundp 'foo) <then> <else>) | |
4065 (if (boundp 'foo) <then> <else) | |
4066 | |
4067 In the first case, using `foo' as a function inside the <then> form | |
4068 won't produce a warning if it's not defined as a function, and in the | |
4069 second case, using `foo' as a variable won't produce a warning if it's | |
4070 unbound. The test must be in exactly one of the above forms (after | |
4071 macro expansion), but such tests may be nested. Note that `when' and | |
4072 `unless' expand to `if', but `cond' doesn't. | |
4073 | |
4074 *** `(featurep 'xemacs)' is treated by the compiler as nil. This | |
4075 helps to avoid noisy compiler warnings in code meant to run under both | |
4076 Emacs and XEmacs and may sometimes make the result significantly more | |
4077 efficient. Since byte code from recent versions of XEmacs won't | |
4078 generally run in Emacs and vice versa, this optimization doesn't lose | |
4079 you anything. | |
4080 | |
4081 *** The local variable `no-byte-compile' in elisp files is now obeyed. | |
4082 | |
4083 --- | |
4084 ** When a Lisp file uses CL functions at run-time, compiling the file | |
4085 now issues warnings about these calls, unless the file performs | |
4086 (require 'cl) when loaded. | |
4087 | |
4088 +++ | |
4089 ** New function unsafep returns nil if the given Lisp form can't possibly | |
4090 do anything dangerous; otherwise it returns a reason why the form might be | |
4091 unsafe (calls dangerous function, alters global variable, etc). | |
4092 | |
4093 +++ | |
4094 ** There is a new Warnings facility; see the functions `warn' | |
4095 and `display-warning'. | |
4096 | |
4097 --- | |
4098 ** VC changes for backends: | |
4099 *** (vc-switches BACKEND OPERATION) is a new function for use by backends. | |
4100 *** The new `find-version' backend function replaces the `destfile' | |
4101 parameter of the `checkout' backend function. | |
4102 Old code still works thanks to a default `find-version' behavior that | |
4103 uses the old `destfile' parameter. | |
4104 | |
4105 +++ | |
4106 ** Already true in Emacs 21.1, but not emphasized clearly enough: | |
4107 | |
4108 Multibyte buffers can now faithfully record all 256 character codes | |
4109 from 0 to 255. As a result, most of the past reasons to use unibyte | |
4110 buffers no longer exist. We only know of three reasons to use them | |
4111 now: | |
4112 | |
4113 1. If you prefer to use unibyte text all of the time. | |
4114 | |
4115 2. For reading files into temporary buffers, when you want to avoid | |
4116 the time it takes to convert the format. | |
4117 | |
4118 3. For binary files where format conversion would be pointless and | |
4119 wasteful. | |
4120 | |
4121 --- | |
4122 ** set-buffer-file-coding-system now takes an additional argument, | |
4123 NOMODIFY. If it is non-nil, it means don't mark the buffer modified. | |
4124 | |
4125 +++ | |
4126 ** The new variable `auto-coding-functions' lets you specify functions | |
4127 to examine a file being visited and deduce the proper coding system | |
4128 for it. (If the coding system is detected incorrectly for a specific | |
4129 file, you can put a `coding:' tags to override it.) | |
4130 | |
4131 --- | |
4132 ** The new function `merge-coding-systems' fills in unspecified aspects | |
4133 of one coding system from another coding system. | |
4134 | |
4135 --- | |
4136 ** New coding system property `mime-text-unsuitable' indicates that | |
4137 the coding system's `mime-charset' is not suitable for MIME text | |
4138 parts, e.g. utf-16. | |
4139 | |
4140 +++ | |
4141 ** New function `decode-coding-inserted-region' decodes a region as if | |
4142 it is read from a file without decoding. | |
4143 | |
4144 +++ | |
4145 ** Function `translate-region' accepts also a char-table as TABLE | |
4146 argument. | |
4147 | |
4148 +++ | |
4149 ** The new translation table `translation-table-for-input' | |
4150 is used for customizing self-insertion. The character to | |
4151 be inserted is translated through it. | |
4152 | |
4153 --- | |
4154 ** New CCL functions `lookup-character' and `lookup-integer' access | |
4155 hash tables defined by the Lisp function `define-translation-hash-table'. | |
4156 | |
4157 +++ | |
4158 ** The flags, width, and precision options for %-specifications in function | |
4159 `format' are now documented. Some flags that were accepted but not | |
4160 implemented (such as "*") are no longer accepted. | |
4161 | |
4162 --- | |
4163 ** New function `redirect-debugging-output' can be used to redirect | |
4164 debugging output on the stderr file handle to a file. | |
4165 | |
4166 +++ | |
4167 ** `makehash' is now obsolete. Use `make-hash-table' instead. | |
4168 | |
4169 +++ | |
4170 ** The macro `with-syntax-table' does not copy the table any more. | |
4171 | |
4172 +++ | |
4173 ** New variables `gc-elapsed' and `gcs-done' provide extra information | |
4174 on garbage collection. | |
4175 | |
4176 +++ | |
4177 ** New function `locale-info' accesses locale information. | |
4178 | |
4179 +++ | |
4180 ** The new variable `print-continuous-numbering', when non-nil, says | |
4181 that successive calls to print functions should use the same | |
4182 numberings for circular structure references. This is only relevant | |
4183 when `print-circle' is non-nil. | |
4184 | |
4185 When you bind `print-continuous-numbering' to t, you should | |
4186 also bind `print-number-table' to nil. | |
4187 | |
4188 --- | |
4189 ** When pure storage overflows while dumping, Emacs now prints how | |
4190 much pure storage it will approximately need. | |
4191 | |
4192 +++ | |
4193 ** File local variables. | |
4194 | |
4195 A file local variables list cannot specify a string with text | |
4196 properties--any specified text properties are discarded. | |
4197 | |
4198 +++ | |
4199 ** The variable `safe-local-eval-forms' specifies a list of forms that | |
4200 are ok to evaluate when they appear in an `eval' local variables | |
4201 specification. Normally Emacs asks for confirmation before evaluating | |
4202 such a form, but if the form appears in this list, no confirmation is | |
4203 needed. | |
4204 | |
4205 --- | |
4206 ** If a function has a non-nil `safe-local-eval-function' property, | |
4207 that means it is ok to evaluate some calls to that function when it | |
4208 appears in an `eval' local variables specification. If the property | |
4209 is t, then any form calling that function with constant arguments is | |
4210 ok. If the property is a function or list of functions, they are called | |
4211 with the form as argument, and if any returns t, the form is ok to call. | |
4212 | |
4213 If the form is not "ok to call", that means Emacs asks for | |
4214 confirmation as before. | |
4215 | |
4216 +++ | |
4217 ** Renamed hooks to better follow the naming convention: | |
4218 find-file-hooks to find-file-hook, | |
4219 find-file-not-found-hooks to find-file-not-found-functions, | |
4220 write-file-hooks to write-file-functions, | |
4221 write-contents-hooks to write-contents-functions, | |
4222 x-lost-selection-hooks to x-lost-selection-functions, | |
4223 x-sent-selection-hooks to x-sent-selection-functions. | |
4224 Marked local-write-file-hooks as obsolete (use the LOCAL arg of `add-hook'). | |
4225 | |
4226 +++ | |
4227 ** The new variable `delete-frame-functions' replaces `delete-frame-hook'. | |
4228 It was renamed to follow the naming conventions for abnormal hooks. The old | |
4229 name remains available as an alias, but has been marked obsolete. | |
4230 | |
4231 +++ | |
4232 ** The new function `file-remote-p' tests a file name and returns | |
4233 non-nil if it specifies a remote file (one that Emacs accesses using | |
4234 its own special methods and not directly through the file system). | |
4235 The value in that case is an identifier for the remote file system. | |
4236 | |
4237 +++ | |
4238 ** Functions `get' and `plist-get' no longer signals an error for | |
4239 a malformed property list. They also detect cyclic lists. | |
4240 | |
4241 +++ | |
4242 ** The function `atan' now accepts an optional second argument. | |
4243 | |
4244 When called with 2 arguments, as in `(atan Y X)', `atan' returns the | |
4245 angle in radians between the vector [X, Y] and the X axis. (This is | |
4246 equivalent to the standard C library function `atan2'.) | |
4247 | |
4248 +++ | |
4249 ** New function format-mode-line. | |
4250 | |
4251 This returns the mode-line or header-line of the selected (or a | |
4252 specified) window as a string with or without text properties. | |
4253 | |
4254 +++ | |
4255 ** The new mode-line construct `(:propertize ELT PROPS...)' can be | |
4256 used to add text properties to mode-line elements. | |
4257 | |
4258 +++ | |
4259 ** The new `%i' and `%I' constructs for `mode-line-format' can be used | |
4260 to display the size of the accessible part of the buffer on the mode | |
4261 line. | |
4262 | |
4263 --- | |
4264 ** Indentation of simple and extended loop forms has been added to the | |
4265 cl-indent package. The new user options | |
4266 `lisp-loop-keyword-indentation', `lisp-loop-forms-indentation', and | |
4267 `lisp-simple-loop-indentation' can be used to customize the | |
4268 indentation of keywords and forms in loop forms. | |
4269 | |
4270 --- | |
4271 ** Indentation of backquoted forms has been made customizable in the | |
4272 cl-indent package. See the new user option `lisp-backquote-indentation'. | |
4273 | |
4274 +++ | |
4275 ** field-beginning and field-end now accept an additional optional | |
4276 argument, LIMIT. | |
4277 | |
4278 +++ | |
4279 ** define-abbrev now accepts an optional argument SYSTEM-FLAG. If | |
4280 non-nil, this marks the abbrev as a "system" abbrev, which means that | |
4281 it won't be stored in the user's abbrevs file if he saves the abbrevs. | |
4282 Major modes that predefine some abbrevs should always specify this | |
4283 flag. | |
4284 | |
4285 --- | |
4286 ** describe-vector now takes a second argument `describer' which is | |
4287 called to print the entries' values. It defaults to `princ'. | |
4288 | |
4289 +++ | |
4290 ** defcustom and other custom declarations now use a default group | |
4291 (the last prior group defined in the same file) when no :group was given. | |
4292 | |
4293 --- | |
4294 ** The new customization type `float' specifies numbers with floating | |
4295 point (no integers are allowed). | |
4296 | |
4297 +++ | |
4298 ** emacsserver now runs pre-command-hook and post-command-hook when | |
4299 it receives a request from emacsclient. | |
4300 | |
4301 --- | |
4302 ** New function `text-clone-create'. Text clones are chunks of text | |
4303 that are kept identical by transparently propagating changes from one | |
4304 clone to the other. | |
4305 | |
4306 +++ | |
4307 ** Functions `user-uid' and `user-real-uid' now return floats if the | |
4308 user UID doesn't fit in a Lisp integer. Function `user-full-name' | |
4309 accepts a float as UID parameter. | |
4310 | |
4311 +++ | |
4312 ** New vars `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' used when | |
4313 searching for an executable resp. an elisp file. | |
4314 | |
4315 +++ | |
4316 ** Functions from `post-gc-hook' are run at the end of garbage | |
4317 collection. The hook is run with GC inhibited, so use it with care. | |
4318 | |
4319 +++ | |
4320 ** The variables most-positive-fixnum and most-negative-fixnum | |
4321 hold the largest and smallest possible integer values. | |
4322 | |
4323 --- | |
4324 ** On MS Windows, locale-coding-system is used to interact with the OS. | |
4325 The Windows specific variable w32-system-coding-system, which was | |
4326 formerly used for that purpose is now an alias for locale-coding-system. | |
4327 | |
4328 --- | |
4329 ** New function x-send-client-message sends a client message when | |
4330 running under X. | |
4331 | |
4332 --- | |
4333 ** easy-mmode-define-global-mode has been renamed to | |
4334 define-global-minor-mode. The old name remains as an alias. | |
4335 | |
4336 --- | |
4337 ** To manipulate the File menu using easy-menu, you must specify the | |
4338 proper name "file". In previous Emacs versions, you had to specify | |
4339 "files", even though the menu item itself was changed to say "File" | |
4340 several versions ago. | |
4341 | |
4342 --- | |
4343 ** The dummy function keys made by easymenu are now always lower case. | |
4344 If you specify the menu item name "Ada", for instance, it uses `ada' | |
4230 as the "key" bound by that key binding. | 4345 as the "key" bound by that key binding. |
4231 | 4346 |
4232 This is relevant only if Lisp code looks for | 4347 This is relevant only if Lisp code looks for the bindings that were |
4233 the bindings that were made with easymenu. | 4348 made with easymenu. |
4234 | 4349 |
4235 +++ | 4350 --- |
4236 ** The function `commandp' takes an additional optional | 4351 ** `easy-menu-define' now allows you to use nil for the symbol name |
4237 argument. If it is non-nil, then `commandp' checks | 4352 if you don't need to give the menu a name. If you install the menu |
4238 for a function that could be called with `call-interactively', | 4353 into other keymaps right away (MAPS is non-nil), it usually doesn't |
4239 and does not return t for keyboard macros. | 4354 need to have a name. |
4240 | 4355 |
4241 --- | 4356 ** New functions, macros, and commands: |
4242 ** master-mode.el implements a minor mode for scrolling a slave | 4357 |
4358 +++ | |
4359 *** The new function `assoc-string' replaces `assoc-ignore-case' and | |
4360 `assoc-ignore-representation', which are still available, but have | |
4361 been declared obsolete. | |
4362 | |
4363 +++ | |
4364 *** The new function `buffer-local-value' returns the buffer-local | |
4365 binding of VARIABLE (a symbol) in buffer BUFFER. If VARIABLE does not | |
4366 have a buffer-local binding in buffer BUFFER, it returns the default | |
4367 value of VARIABLE instead. | |
4368 | |
4369 +++ | |
4370 *** The new function `called-interactively-p' does what many people | |
4371 have mistakenly believed `interactive-p' did: it returns t if the | |
4372 calling function was called through `call-interactively'. This should | |
4373 only be used when you cannot add a new "interactive" argument to the | |
4374 command. | |
4375 | |
4376 *** The new function copy-abbrev-table returns a new abbrev table that | |
4377 is a copy of a given abbrev table. | |
4378 | |
4379 +++ | |
4380 *** New function copy-tree makes a copy of a tree, recursively copying | |
4381 both cars and cdrs. | |
4382 | |
4383 +++ | |
4384 *** New function `delete-dups' destructively removes `equal' | |
4385 duplicates from a list. Of several `equal' occurrences of an element | |
4386 in the list, the first one is kept. | |
4387 | |
4388 +++ | |
4389 *** The new function `filter-buffer-substring' extracts a buffer | |
4390 substring, passes it through a set of filter functions, and returns | |
4391 the filtered substring. It is used instead of `buffer-substring' or | |
4392 `delete-and-extract-region' when copying text into a user-accessible | |
4393 data structure, like the kill-ring, X clipboard, or a register. The | |
4394 list of filter function is specified by the new variable | |
4395 `buffer-substring-filters'. For example, Longlines mode uses | |
4396 `buffer-substring-filters' to remove soft newlines from the copied | |
4397 text. | |
4398 | |
4399 +++ | |
4400 *** New functions frame-current-scroll-bars and window-current-scroll-bars. | |
4401 | |
4402 These functions return the current locations of the vertical and | |
4403 horizontal scroll bars in a frame or window. | |
4404 | |
4405 +++ | |
4406 *** The new primitive `get-internal-run-time' returns the processor | |
4407 run time used by Emacs since start-up. | |
4408 | |
4409 +++ | |
4410 *** The new function insert-buffer-substring-as-yank works like | |
4411 `insert-buffer-substring', but removes the text properties in the | |
4412 `yank-excluded-properties' list. | |
4413 | |
4414 +++ | |
4415 *** The new function insert-buffer-substring-no-properties is like | |
4416 insert-buffer-substring, but removes all text properties from the | |
4417 inserted substring. | |
4418 | |
4419 +++ | |
4420 *** The new functions `lax-plist-get' and `lax-plist-put' are like | |
4421 `plist-get' and `plist-put', except that they compare the property | |
4422 name using `equal' rather than `eq'. | |
4423 | |
4424 +++ | |
4425 *** New function `line-number-at-pos' returns the line number of the | |
4426 current line in the current buffer, or if optional buffer position is | |
4427 given, line number of corresponding line in current buffer. | |
4428 | |
4429 +++ | |
4430 *** New function `looking-back' checks whether a regular expression matches | |
4431 the text before point. Specifying the LIMIT argument bounds how far | |
4432 back the match can start; this is a way to keep it from taking too long. | |
4433 | |
4434 +++ | |
4435 *** New function `macroexpand-all' expands all macros in a form. | |
4436 It is similar to the Common-Lisp function of the same name. | |
4437 One difference is that it guarantees to return the original argument | |
4438 if no expansion is done, which may be tested using `eq'. | |
4439 | |
4440 *** The new function `minibufferp' returns non-nil if its optional | |
4441 buffer argument is a minibuffer. If the argument is omitted, it | |
4442 defaults to the current buffer. | |
4443 | |
4444 +++ | |
4445 *** New function minibuffer-selected-window returns the window which | |
4446 was selected when entering the minibuffer. | |
4447 | |
4448 +++ | |
4449 *** The new function `modify-all-frames-parameters' modifies parameters | |
4450 for all (existing and future) frames. | |
4451 | |
4452 +++ | |
4453 *** New functions posn-at-point and posn-at-x-y return | |
4454 click-event-style position information for a given visible buffer | |
4455 position or for a given window pixel coordinate. | |
4456 | |
4457 --- | |
4458 *** New function quail-find-key returns a list of keys to type in the | |
4459 current input method to input a character. | |
4460 | |
4461 +++ | |
4462 *** The new function `rassq-delete-all' deletes all elements from an | |
4463 alist whose cdr is `eq' to a specified value. | |
4464 | |
4465 +++ | |
4466 *** The new function remove-list-of-text-properties is almost the same | |
4467 as `remove-text-properties'. The only difference is that it takes a | |
4468 list of property names as argument rather than a property list. | |
4469 | |
4470 +++ | |
4471 *** The new primitive `set-file-times' sets a file's access and | |
4472 modification times. Magic file name handlers can handle this | |
4473 operation. | |
4474 | |
4475 +++ | |
4476 *** New function substring-no-properties returns a substring without | |
4477 text properties. | |
4478 | |
4479 +++ | |
4480 *** The new function syntax-after returns the syntax code | |
4481 of the character after a specified buffer position, taking account | |
4482 of text properties as well as the character code. | |
4483 | |
4484 +++ | |
4485 *** `syntax-class' extracts the class of a syntax code (as returned | |
4486 by syntax-after). | |
4487 | |
4488 +++ | |
4489 *** New function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu' | |
4490 | |
4491 The `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' must not be used (as previously | |
4492 recommended) for making entries in the tool bar for local keymaps. | |
4493 Instead, use the function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu', which lets | |
4494 you specify the map to use as an argument. | |
4495 | |
4496 +++ | |
4497 *** New function window-body-height. | |
4498 This is like window-height but does not count the mode line | |
4499 or the header line. | |
4500 | |
4501 +++ | |
4502 *** (while-no-input BODY...) runs BODY, but only so long as no input | |
4503 arrives. If the user types or clicks anything, BODY stops as if a | |
4504 quit had occurred. while-no-input returns the value of BODY, if BODY | |
4505 finishes. It returns nil if BODY was aborted. | |
4506 | |
4507 +++ | |
4508 *** New macro with-local-quit temporarily sets inhibit-quit to nil for use | |
4509 around potentially blocking or long-running code in timers | |
4510 and post-command-hooks. | |
4511 | |
4512 ** New packages: | |
4513 | |
4514 *** The new package syntax.el provides an efficient way to find the | |
4515 current syntactic context (as returned by parse-partial-sexp). | |
4516 | |
4517 *** The new package bindat.el provides functions to unpack and pack | |
4518 binary data structures, such as network packets, to and from Lisp | |
4519 data structures. | |
4520 | |
4521 --- | |
4522 *** The TCL package tcl-mode.el was replaced by tcl.el. | |
4523 This was actually done in Emacs-21.1, and was not documented. | |
4524 | |
4525 +++ | |
4526 *** The new package button.el implements simple and fast `clickable buttons' | |
4527 in emacs buffers. `buttons' are much lighter-weight than the `widgets' | |
4528 implemented by widget.el, and can be used by lisp code that doesn't | |
4529 require the full power of widgets. Emacs uses buttons for such things | |
4530 as help and apropos buffers. | |
4531 | |
4532 --- | |
4533 *** master-mode.el implements a minor mode for scrolling a slave | |
4243 buffer without leaving your current buffer, the master buffer. | 4534 buffer without leaving your current buffer, the master buffer. |
4244 | 4535 |
4245 It can be used by sql.el, for example: the SQL buffer is the master | 4536 It can be used by sql.el, for example: the SQL buffer is the master |
4246 and its SQLi buffer is the slave. This allows you to scroll the SQLi | 4537 and its SQLi buffer is the slave. This allows you to scroll the SQLi |
4247 buffer containing the output from the SQL buffer containing the | 4538 buffer containing the output from the SQL buffer containing the |
4258 (add-hook 'sql-set-sqli-hook | 4549 (add-hook 'sql-set-sqli-hook |
4259 (function (lambda () | 4550 (function (lambda () |
4260 (master-set-slave sql-buffer)))) | 4551 (master-set-slave sql-buffer)))) |
4261 | 4552 |
4262 +++ | 4553 +++ |
4263 ** File local variables. | 4554 *** New Lisp library testcover.el works with edebug to help you determine |
4264 | 4555 whether you've tested all your Lisp code. Function testcover-start |
4265 A file local variables list cannot specify a string with text | 4556 instruments all functions in a given file. Then test your code. Function |
4266 properties--any specified text properties are discarded. | 4557 testcover-mark-all adds overlay "splotches" to the Lisp file's buffer to |
4267 | 4558 show where coverage is lacking. Command testcover-next-mark (bind it to |
4268 +++ | 4559 a key!) will move point forward to the next spot that has a splotch. |
4269 ** New function window-body-height. | 4560 |
4270 | 4561 Normally, a red splotch indicates the form was never completely |
4271 This is like window-height but does not count the mode line | 4562 evaluated; a brown splotch means it always evaluated to the same |
4272 or the header line. | 4563 value. The red splotches are skipped for forms that can't possibly |
4273 | 4564 complete their evaluation, such as `error'. The brown splotches are |
4274 +++ | 4565 skipped for forms that are expected to always evaluate to the same |
4275 ** New function format-mode-line. | 4566 value, such as (setq x 14). |
4276 | 4567 |
4277 This returns the mode-line or header-line of the selected (or a | 4568 For difficult cases, you can add do-nothing macros to your code to |
4278 specified) window as a string with or without text properties. | 4569 help out the test coverage tool. The macro `noreturn' suppresses a |
4279 | 4570 red splotch. It is an error if the argument to `noreturn' does |
4280 +++ | 4571 return. The macro 1value suppresses a brown splotch for its argument. |
4281 ** Functions `get' and `plist-get' no longer signals an error for | 4572 This macro is a no-op except during test-coverage -- then it signals |
4282 a malformed property list. They also detect cyclic lists. | 4573 an error if the argument actually returns differing values. |
4283 | |
4284 +++ | |
4285 ** New functions `lax-plist-get' and `lax-plist-put'. | |
4286 | |
4287 These functions are like `plist-get' and `plist-put' except that they | |
4288 compare the property name using `equal' rather than `eq'. | |
4289 | |
4290 +++ | |
4291 ** New function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu' | |
4292 | |
4293 The `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' must not be used (as previously | |
4294 recommended) for making entries in the tool bar for local keymaps. | |
4295 Instead, use the function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu', which lets | |
4296 you specify the map to use as an argument. | |
4297 | |
4298 +++ | |
4299 ** The function `atan' now accepts an optional second argument. | |
4300 | |
4301 When called with 2 arguments, as in `(atan Y X)', `atan' returns the | |
4302 angle in radians between the vector [X, Y] and the X axis. (This is | |
4303 equivalent to the standard C library function `atan2'.) | |
4304 | |
4305 +++ | |
4306 ** You can now make a window as short as one line. | |
4307 | |
4308 A window that is just one line tall does not display either a mode | |
4309 line or a header line, even if the variables `mode-line-format' and | |
4310 `header-line-format' call for them. A window that is two lines tall | |
4311 cannot display both a mode line and a header line at once; if the | |
4312 variables call for both, only the mode line actually appears. | |
4313 | |
4314 +++ | |
4315 ** The new frame parameter `tty-color-mode' specifies the mode to use | |
4316 for color support on character terminal frames. Its value can be a | |
4317 number of colors to support, or a symbol. See the Emacs Lisp | |
4318 Reference manual for more detailed documentation. | |
4319 | |
4320 +++ | |
4321 ** The new mode-line construct `(:propertize ELT PROPS...)' can be | |
4322 used to add text properties to mode-line elements. | |
4323 | |
4324 +++ | |
4325 ** The new `%i' and `%I' constructs for `mode-line-format' can be used | |
4326 to display the size of the accessible part of the buffer on the mode | |
4327 line. | |
4328 | |
4329 --- | |
4330 ** Indentation of simple and extended loop forms has been added to the | |
4331 cl-indent package. The new user options | |
4332 `lisp-loop-keyword-indentation', `lisp-loop-forms-indentation', and | |
4333 `lisp-simple-loop-indentation' can be used to customize the | |
4334 indentation of keywords and forms in loop forms. | |
4335 | |
4336 --- | |
4337 ** Indentation of backquoted forms has been made customizable in the | |
4338 cl-indent package. See the new user option `lisp-backquote-indentation'. | |
4339 | |
4340 +++ | |
4341 ** Already true in Emacs 21.1, but not emphasized clearly enough: | |
4342 | |
4343 Multibyte buffers can now faithfully record all 256 character codes | |
4344 from 0 to 255. As a result, most of the past reasons to use unibyte | |
4345 buffers no longer exist. We only know of three reasons to use them | |
4346 now: | |
4347 | |
4348 1. If you prefer to use unibyte text all of the time. | |
4349 | |
4350 2. For reading files into temporary buffers, when you want to avoid | |
4351 the time it takes to convert the format. | |
4352 | |
4353 3. For binary files where format conversion would be pointless and | |
4354 wasteful. | |
4355 | |
4356 +++ | |
4357 ** If text has a `keymap' property, that keymap takes precedence | |
4358 over minor mode keymaps. | |
4359 | |
4360 +++ | |
4361 ** A hex escape in a string forces the string to be multibyte. | |
4362 An octal escape makes it unibyte. | |
4363 | |
4364 +++ | |
4365 ** At the end of a command, point moves out from within invisible | |
4366 text, in the same way it moves out from within text covered by an | |
4367 image or composition property. | |
4368 | |
4369 This makes it generally unnecessary to mark invisible text as intangible. | |
4370 This is particularly good because the intangible property often has | |
4371 unexpected side-effects since the property applies to everything | |
4372 (including `goto-char', ...) whereas this new code is only run after | |
4373 post-command-hook and thus does not care about intermediate states. | |
4374 | |
4375 +++ | |
4376 ** field-beginning and field-end now accept an additional optional | |
4377 argument, LIMIT. | |
4378 | |
4379 +++ | |
4380 ** define-abbrev now accepts an optional argument SYSTEM-FLAG. If | |
4381 non-nil, this marks the abbrev as a "system" abbrev, which means that | |
4382 it won't be stored in the user's abbrevs file if he saves the abbrevs. | |
4383 Major modes that predefine some abbrevs should always specify this | |
4384 flag. | |
4385 | 4574 |
4386 --- | 4575 --- |
4387 ** Support for Mocklisp has been removed. | 4576 ** Support for Mocklisp has been removed. |
4388 | 4577 |
4389 --- | 4578 --- |
4390 ** The function insert-string is now obsolete. | 4579 ** The function insert-string is now obsolete. |
4391 | |
4392 --- | |
4393 ** The precedence of file-name-handlers has been changed. | |
4394 Instead of blindly choosing the first handler that matches, | |
4395 find-file-name-handler now gives precedence to a file-name handler | |
4396 that matches near the end of the file name. More specifically, the | |
4397 handler whose (match-beginning 0) is the largest is chosen. | |
4398 In case of ties, the old "first matched" rule applies. | |
4399 | |
4400 --- | |
4401 ** Dense keymaps now handle inheritance correctly. | |
4402 Previously a dense keymap would hide all of the simple-char key | |
4403 bindings of the parent keymap. | |
4404 | |
4405 --- | |
4406 ** jit-lock obeys a new text-property `jit-lock-defer-multiline'. | |
4407 If a piece of text with that property gets contextually refontified | |
4408 (see jit-lock-defer-contextually), then all of that text will | |
4409 be refontified. This is useful when the syntax of a textual element | |
4410 depends on text several lines further down (and when font-lock-multiline | |
4411 is not appropriate to solve that problem). For example in Perl: | |
4412 | |
4413 s{ | |
4414 foo | |
4415 }{ | |
4416 bar | |
4417 }e | |
4418 | |
4419 Adding/removing the last `e' changes the `bar' from being a piece of | |
4420 text to being a piece of code, so you'd put a jit-lock-defer-multiline | |
4421 property over the second half of the command to force (deferred) | |
4422 refontification of `bar' whenever the `e' is added/removed. | |
4423 | |
4424 --- | |
4425 ** describe-vector now takes a second argument `describer' which is | |
4426 called to print the entries' values. It defaults to `princ'. | |
4427 | |
4428 +++ | |
4429 ** defcustom and other custom declarations now use a default group | |
4430 (the last prior group defined in the same file) when no :group was given. | |
4431 | |
4432 +++ | |
4433 ** emacsserver now runs pre-command-hook and post-command-hook when | |
4434 it receives a request from emacsclient. | |
4435 | |
4436 --- | |
4437 ** The variable `recursive-load-depth-limit' has been deleted. | |
4438 Emacs now signals an error if the same file is loaded with more | |
4439 than 3 levels of nesting. | |
4440 | |
4441 --- | |
4442 ** If a major mode function has a non-nil `no-clone-indirect' | |
4443 property, `clone-indirect-buffer' signals an error if you use | |
4444 it in that buffer. | |
4445 | |
4446 --- | |
4447 ** In `replace-match', the replacement text no longer inherits | |
4448 properties from surrounding text. | |
4449 | |
4450 +++ | |
4451 ** The list returned by `(match-data t)' now has the buffer as a final | |
4452 element, if the last match was on a buffer. `set-match-data' | |
4453 accepts such a list for restoring the match state. | |
4454 | |
4455 +++ | |
4456 ** New function `buffer-local-value'. | |
4457 | |
4458 This function returns the buffer-local binding of VARIABLE (a symbol) | |
4459 in buffer BUFFER. If VARIABLE does not have a buffer-local binding in | |
4460 buffer BUFFER, it returns the default value of VARIABLE instead. | |
4461 | |
4462 --- | |
4463 ** New function `text-clone-create'. Text clones are chunks of text | |
4464 that are kept identical by transparently propagating changes from one | |
4465 clone to the other. | |
4466 | |
4467 +++ | |
4468 ** font-lock can manage arbitrary text-properties beside `face'. | |
4469 *** the FACENAME returned in font-lock-keywords can be a list | |
4470 of the form (face FACE PROP1 VAL1 PROP2 VAL2 ...) so you can set | |
4471 other properties than `face'. | |
4472 *** font-lock-extra-managed-props can be set to make sure those extra | |
4473 properties are automatically cleaned up by font-lock. | |
4474 | |
4475 --- | |
4476 ** The special treatment of faces whose names are of the form `fg:COLOR' | |
4477 or `bg:COLOR' has been removed. Lisp programs should use the | |
4478 `defface' facility for defining faces with specific colors, or use | |
4479 the feature of specifying the face attributes :foreground and :background | |
4480 directly in the `face' property instead of using a named face. | |
4481 | |
4482 +++ | |
4483 ** The new function `run-mode-hooks' and the new macro `delay-mode-hooks' | |
4484 are used by define-derived-mode to make sure the mode hook for the | |
4485 parent mode is run at the end of the child mode. | |
4486 | |
4487 +++ | |
4488 ** define-minor-mode now accepts arbitrary additional keyword arguments | |
4489 and simply passes them to defcustom, if applicable. | |
4490 | |
4491 +++ | |
4492 ** define-derived-mode by default creates a new empty abbrev table. | |
4493 It does not copy abbrevs from the parent mode's abbrev table. | |
4494 | |
4495 +++ | |
4496 ** `provide' and `featurep' now accept an optional second argument | |
4497 to test/provide subfeatures. Also `provide' now checks `after-load-alist' | |
4498 and runs any code associated with the provided feature. | |
4499 | |
4500 +++ | |
4501 ** Functions `file-name-sans-extension' and `file-name-extension' now | |
4502 ignore the leading dots in file names, so that file names such as | |
4503 `.emacs' are treated as extensionless. | |
4504 | |
4505 +++ | |
4506 ** Functions `user-uid' and `user-real-uid' now return floats if the | |
4507 user UID doesn't fit in a Lisp integer. Function `user-full-name' | |
4508 accepts a float as UID parameter. | |
4509 | |
4510 --- | |
4511 ** `define-key-after' now accepts keys longer than 1. | |
4512 | |
4513 +++ | |
4514 ** The local variable `no-byte-compile' in elisp files is now obeyed. | |
4515 | |
4516 +++ | |
4517 ** The Emacs Lisp byte-compiler now displays the actual line and | |
4518 character position of errors, where possible. Additionally, the form | |
4519 of its warning and error messages have been brought more in line with | |
4520 the output of other GNU tools. | |
4521 | |
4522 +++ | |
4523 ** New functions `keymap-prompt' and `current-active-maps'. | |
4524 | |
4525 --- | |
4526 ** New function `describe-buffer-bindings'. | |
4527 | |
4528 +++ | |
4529 ** New vars `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' used when | |
4530 searching for an executable resp. an elisp file. | |
4531 | |
4532 +++ | |
4533 ** Variable aliases have been implemented: | |
4534 | |
4535 *** defvaralias ALIAS-VAR BASE-VAR [DOCSTRING] | |
4536 | |
4537 This function defines the symbol ALIAS-VAR as a variable alias for | |
4538 symbol BASE-VAR. This means that retrieving the value of ALIAS-VAR | |
4539 returns the value of BASE-VAR, and changing the value of ALIAS-VAR | |
4540 changes the value of BASE-VAR. | |
4541 | |
4542 DOCSTRING, if present, is the documentation for ALIAS-VAR; else it has | |
4543 the same documentation as BASE-VAR. | |
4544 | |
4545 *** indirect-variable VARIABLE | |
4546 | |
4547 This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases | |
4548 of VARIABLE. If VARIABLE is not a symbol, or if VARIABLE is not | |
4549 defined as an alias, the function returns VARIABLE. | |
4550 | |
4551 It might be noteworthy that variables aliases work for all kinds of | |
4552 variables, including buffer-local and frame-local variables. | |
4553 | |
4554 +++ | |
4555 ** Functions from `post-gc-hook' are run at the end of garbage | |
4556 collection. The hook is run with GC inhibited, so use it with care. | |
4557 | |
4558 +++ | |
4559 ** If the second argument to `copy-file' is the name of a directory, | |
4560 the file is copied to that directory instead of signaling an error. | |
4561 | |
4562 +++ | |
4563 ** The variables most-positive-fixnum and most-negative-fixnum | |
4564 hold the largest and smallest possible integer values. | |
4565 | |
4566 --- | |
4567 ** On MS Windows, locale-coding-system is used to interact with the OS. | |
4568 The Windows specific variable w32-system-coding-system, which was | |
4569 formerly used for that purpose is now an alias for locale-coding-system. | |
4570 | |
4571 --- | |
4572 ** Functions y-or-n-p, read-char, read-key-sequence and the like, that | |
4573 display a prompt but don't use the minibuffer, now display the prompt | |
4574 using the text properties (esp. the face) of the prompt string. | |
4575 | |
4576 --- | |
4577 ** New function x-send-client-message sends a client message when | |
4578 running under X. | |
4579 | |
4580 +++ | |
4581 ** Arguments for remove-overlays are now optional, so that you can remove | |
4582 all overlays in the buffer by just calling (remove-overlay). | |
4583 | |
4584 ** New packages: | |
4585 | |
4586 +++ | |
4587 *** The new package gdb-ui.el provides an enhanced graphical interface to | |
4588 GDB. You can interact with GDB through the GUD buffer in the usual way, but | |
4589 there are also further buffers which control the execution and describe the | |
4590 state of your program. It separates the input/output of your program from | |
4591 that of GDB and watches expressions in the speedbar. It also uses features of | |
4592 Emacs 21 such as the display margin for breakpoints, and the toolbar. | |
4593 | |
4594 Use M-x gdba to start GDB-UI. | |
4595 | |
4596 *** The new package syntax.el provides an efficient way to find the | |
4597 current syntactic context (as returned by parse-partial-sexp). | |
4598 | |
4599 *** The new package bindat.el provides functions to unpack and pack | |
4600 binary data structures, such as network packets, to and from Lisp | |
4601 data structures. | |
4602 | |
4603 --- | |
4604 *** The TCL package tcl-mode.el was replaced by tcl.el. | |
4605 This was actually done in Emacs-21.1, and was not documented. | |
4606 | |
4607 +++ | |
4608 *** The new package button.el implements simple and fast `clickable buttons' | |
4609 in emacs buffers. `buttons' are much lighter-weight than the `widgets' | |
4610 implemented by widget.el, and can be used by lisp code that doesn't | |
4611 require the full power of widgets. Emacs uses buttons for such things | |
4612 as help and apropos buffers. | |
4613 | |
4614 | 4580 |
4615 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.3 | 4581 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.3 |
4616 | 4582 |
4617 ** Support for GNU/Linux on little-endian MIPS and on IBM S390 has | 4583 ** Support for GNU/Linux on little-endian MIPS and on IBM S390 has |
4618 been added. | 4584 been added. |